JP2020018940A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing an actuation error.SOLUTION: When reading control processing is executed by control means, in the reading control processing, reading of control data and control based on the read control data are repeated, based on determination of control data determination means that, the read control data is predetermined specific data, the reading control processing is finished, and processing is transited to next processing to be executed according to a control procedure. Therefore, it is not necessary to regulate how many times reading of the control data, and the control based on the read control data should be repeated, in a control program, so that, such a situation in which a designer of the control program regulates a repetition number by mistake, can be suppressed. Therefore, a game machine can be suppressed from actuating by error.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball in a starting winning opening is a winning. In such a gaming machine, when the game state is changed, for example, when the game machine transitions to the hit state or when the game state ends, the initial value is set to a plurality of set values corresponding to the changed game state. A predetermined value is set. As a method for setting the initial value, there is a method in which the number of set values is defined in a control program, and the control for setting the initial value is repeated by the number of set values.

JP 2001-276365 A

  However, in such a gaming machine, if the model is different, the winning state and the state of the state after the winning may be different, so the number of setting values to be set when changing the gaming state varies depending on the model. There is a risk of doing this. Therefore, when applying a control program to another model having a different number of set values, the designer needs to count the number of set values for each model to be applied and redefine the number of repetitions in the control program. Was. For this reason, if an incorrect number of repetitions is specified in the control program due to a mistake of the designer, all initial values cannot be set, and the gaming machine may malfunction after the gaming state is changed. .

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a malfunction of the gaming machine.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a control unit that executes a game control according to a predetermined control procedure, a storage unit that stores control data read by the control unit, Control data determination means for determining whether the control data read by the control means is predetermined specific data, the control means reads the control data according to the control procedure, When performing a read control process, which is a process of repeatedly performing control based on the read control data, based on that the control data determination unit determines that the read control data is the specific data, This ends the read control process and shifts to the next process executed according to the control procedure.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the control data is set to a setting destination data indicating a setting destination for performing a setting related to a game and a setting destination indicated by the setting destination data. And the setting data are alternately defined, and the read control process reads the data in the order specified by the control data, and sets the data to the setting destination indicated by the read setting data. The setting data to be read next is set.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the second aspect, further comprising state change determination means for determining whether or not to change the gaming state, and the control data is such that various set values relating to the gaming state are different from each other. It is defined as setting data, and executes the read control process when it is determined that the game state is changed by the state change determination unit.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the control of the game is executed by the control means according to a predetermined control procedure, the control data read by the control means is stored in the storage means, and the read control data is stored in advance in the storage means. Whether or not the specific data is determined is determined by the control data determining means. When the control unit executes a read control process of repeatedly reading control data and performing control based on the read control data, it is determined that the read control data is predetermined specific data. Based on the determination by the means, the read control process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process executed according to the control procedure.

  Accordingly, in the read control process, if the specific data is read, the process proceeds to the next process, so that it is not necessary to define how many times the control data read and the control based on the read control data are repeated. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control from being performed a different number of times from the number of repetitions to be performed by the read control process due to a mistake in defining the number of repetitions. Therefore, there is an effect that a malfunction of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, setting data indicating a setting destination for performing settings related to the game and setting data for setting the setting destination indicated by the setting data are alternately defined in the control data. The data is read by the read control process in the order specified by the control data, and the next setting data to be read is set to the setting destination indicated by the read setting data.

  Accordingly, when reading data, it is not necessary to perform a process of determining which data should be read next among the data specified in the control data, so that the processing load on the control unit can be reduced. There is an effect that can be.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the second aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not the game state is changed is determined by the state change determination unit. Various setting values relating to the gaming state are defined in the control data as setting data. When it is determined by the state change determining means that the game state is to be changed, the reading control processing is executed by the control means.

  Thereby, when the game state is changed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a malfunction of the gaming machine without setting the set value to be set.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a first hit type counter C2 and a big hit type in a special symbol. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a second random number counter C4 and a hit in an ordinary symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the game result setting table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the state setting table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit end setting table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit end clear table. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of various setting value storage areas. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a register. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit determination processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the game result set value acquisition processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the setting process at the time of a miss which is performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a data setting process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the zero setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the big hit end setting / clear table in the second embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the initial value setting table at the end of the big hit in the third embodiment. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows zero setting processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 3rd embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have uniformity. In the present pachinko machine 10, three stages of “city stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage” are provided. There are two stages. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 described later are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “the empty stage” → "Island stage" → "City stage" → ... repeatedly. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and when the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first symbol) is selected when the ball passes through the second entrance 67. Lottery). In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance opening 64, the winning or non-judgment of the special symbol jackpot is performed, and if the special symbol jackpot is determined, the type of the jackpot is determined. Is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls are won). ) It is released and the release is repeated a plurality of times. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are 13 types of special symbol jackpot types: "hour jackpot A" to "hour jackpot C", and "probable jackpot A" to "probable jackpot J". The jackpot ends after the special game state ends. As a later added value, a game value (game value) corresponding to these jackpot types is given to the player. Although the details will be described later, for example, when the jackpot type is “probably variable jackpot A”, a game value of shifting to a high probability state of a special symbol is provided after the jackpot is completed. When the jackpot type is “hour saving jackpot B”, a game value is provided in which the normal symbol time saving state continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 30 times after the end of the jackpot.

  In addition, when a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the variation of the special symbol, and after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds), The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entrance port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed in the first symbol display. This is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Accordingly, during the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, it is determined whether the symbol is a hit or not. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. State. In other words, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the first entry opening 64, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is changed to the first symbol display device 37. And at the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, the special symbol jackpot types include “normal jackpot”, “hour jackpot A”, “hour jackpot B”, “extra jackpot A”, “extra jackpot B”, and “probable jackpot A” to “ There are 13 types of “probably variable jackpot H”.

  When the "normal jackpot" is reached, a special game state in which the number of rounds is 16 (16 rounds jackpot) is obtained, but no added value is given after the jackpot ends. That is, after the end of the big hit, the state shifts to the special symbol low probability state, and does not shift to the “normal symbol time reduction state” (normal symbol time reduction).

  In the case of “hour-saving jackpot A” and “hour-saving jackpot B”, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16 round jackpots). ”(Normally during the time reduction of symbols). However, the period during which the "normal time saving state" (normal time saving during normal time) is different between "time saving big hit A" and "time saving big hit B". Specifically, in the case of "hour-saving jackpot A", the probability of winning a regular symbol increases from the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery 20 times, regardless of the state when the jackpot is won. On the other hand, in the “time saving big hit B”, there is a difference in a period in which the “normal symbol time saving state” continues according to the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. Specifically, if the special symbol has a high probability of winning in the "Time Saving Big B", the winning probability of the ordinary symbol will increase from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times. In the case where the "time saving big hit B" is won during the low probability state of the symbol, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol increases from the end of the big hit to the end of the special symbol lottery 20 times. In the present embodiment, the period in which the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is continued is defined by the number of lotteries of the special symbol, but may be defined by the number of times the variation of the special symbol ends.

  In addition, when the "special jackpot A" or the "special jackpot B" is won, each of the number of rounds is set to a special game state of eight rounds (8 round jackpot), and thereafter, according to the state before winning the jackpot, The state shifts to a "special symbol high probability state" or a "special symbol low probability state" and a "normal symbol time reduction state". Specifically, if you win "Special Jackpot A" or "Special Jackpot B" during the time-saving of the regular symbol given after various time-saving jackpots, after the jackpot is over, it will transition to the "special symbol high probability state" I do. On the other hand, in the state other than during the time saving of the normal symbol given after the end of the various time saving jackpots (that is, during the high probability state of the special symbol, or during the low probability state of the special symbol, and during the normal state of the ordinary symbol) When the "special jackpot A" or the "special jackpot B" is won, the state shifts to the "normal symbol time reduction state". In addition, the period during which the "normal symbol time reduction state" continues after the end of the jackpot is until the special symbol lottery is completed 20 times in the "special jackpot A", and the special symbol in the "special jackpot B" Until the lottery is completed 30 times.

  Further, in the “probably variable jackpot A” to the “probably variable jackpot H”, all of them are in the special game state, and thereafter, the state is shifted to the “special symbol high probability state” as an added value after the end of the big hit. However, in the “probably variable jackpot A” to the “probably variable jackpot H”, the number of rounds of the jackpot and the operation pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are different from each other. Specifically, in the “probably variable jackpot A” to “probably variable jackpot D”, the number of rounds is a 16-round special game state (16 rounds jackpot), and in the “probably variable jackpot E” to “probably variable jackpot H”, the number of rounds is Two rounds of special game state (two rounds big hit).

  Further, in the “probably variable jackpot A” or the “probably variable jackpot F” to “probably variable jackpot H”, in each round during the special game state, the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is determined by another jackpot type. Is different from Specifically, in "hour jackpot A" to "hour jackpot C", "probable jackpot A", "probable jackpot B", "probable jackpot D" to "probable jackpot G", 30 seconds elapse in each round. , Or the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened until 10 balls are won. On the other hand, in the “probable variable jackpot C” and “probable variable jackpot H” to “probable variable jackpot J”, In the round, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened until 0.5 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since an upper limit is set for the number of firings of a game ball (for example, a maximum of 100 times per minute), a specific winning opening (large opening opening) is required within 0.5 seconds. It is extremely difficult to make 10 balls win in 65a), and in most cases, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed before 10 balls win. Therefore, in “probably variable jackpot C” and “probably variable jackpot H” to “probably variable jackpot J”, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player per round is smaller than that of other jackpot types.

  Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (during a special symbol being changed), in other words, the special game state (big hit). It is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, a case where the special symbol is not in the high probability state is called a special symbol low probability state, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the special symbol probability state, that is, the special symbol jackpot probability is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of the special symbol). The “normal symbol time reduction state” (medium symbol time reduction) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases and a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state", it is called "normal symbol normal state", which means that the normal symbol hit probability is normal state, that is, the hit probability is lower than during normal time. .

  After that, the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol from the end of the special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol lottery after one of the “hour jackpot A” and the “hour jackpot B” is finished. Until a predetermined number of times (20 times, 30 times) is completed, it is generally referred to as a symbol shortening period. In addition, in order to make the description easy to understand, the number of lotteries of the special symbol is used to indicate the time reduction period of the ordinary symbol. For example, if the predetermined number of times is 20, the time reduction period of the normal symbol is described as 20 times. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with various gaming states such as a big hit state, a normal symbol time saving state, a special symbol positive change state, and the like, and the player's interest is improved. I have.

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot according to the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot, the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening port) 65a in each round, and the state after the end of the jackpot, according to the type of the jackpot. (Whether the special symbol is in a probable state or the normal symbol is in a time saving state). On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common regardless of the type of jackpot, or the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening port) 65a in each round may be common regardless of the type of jackpot. Also, for example, instead of changing the period during which the “normal symbol time saving state” is set according to the type of the jackpot, a time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 or one time The number of times the electric accessory is opened at the time of the normal symbol may be changed. Further, the number of rounds and the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are not limited to the aspect of the present embodiment. For example, a 4-round jackpot or a 9-round jackpot may be provided. As the closing condition of the winning opening (large opening) 65a, for example, a condition "until 3 seconds elapse or until ten balls are won", or a condition "until 10 seconds elapse or five balls are won" A jackpot with the condition "until" may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot is finished, it is configured to shift to any one of the "high probability state of the special symbol" or the "time saving state of the ordinary symbol". Until the special symbol lottery is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) from the end, the special symbol high probability state is always configured, and after the predetermined number of special symbol lottery ends, The transition to the “low probability state of the special symbol” and the “normal time saving state of the ordinary symbol” or the “normal state of the ordinary symbol” may be adopted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type becomes “hour-saving jackpot A”, the normal symbol time-saving state continues after the “hour-saving jackpot A” ends and the special symbol lottery ends 20 times. ”, The time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is continued until the special symbol lottery ends 20 or 30 times after the“ hour-saving jackpot B ”ends, but the duration of the time-saving state may be arbitrarily determined. . For example, if the jackpot type becomes "hour jackpot A", after the "hour jackpot A" ends, until the special symbol lottery ends 60 times, the normal symbol time saving state is continued. The time saving state of the normal symbol may be continued until the special symbol lottery ends 120 times after the “hour saving big hit B” ends. Further, instead of the number of lotteries of the special symbol, the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot types ("hour saving jackpot A", "special jackpot A", and "special jackpot A") differing in the added value given to the player after the jackpot is completed according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won. A special jackpot B ") is provided, but the added value given to the player after the end of the jackpot may be fixed regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. For example, in the case of winning the "time-saving jackpot A", the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times after the jackpot, regardless of the state of the jackpot winning, If the special jackpot A or the special jackpot B is won, the state may be changed to the special symbol high probability state after the jackpot irrespective of the state at the time of the jackpot winning.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a variation by displaying a lighting state to indicate whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting winning) into the first ball entrance 64, is performed, or the variation is performed. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a change is not executed among the balls inserted into the first entrance 64. The number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being fluctuated on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entering the first entrance 64 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four times, but three times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). In the present embodiment, only one first ball entrance 64 is provided, but a plurality of first ball entrances 64 may be provided. In this case, the configuration may be such that the entry of the ball is suspended for each type of the first entry port 64 into which the ball has entered. Further, when the variation is executed in accordance with the reserved ball, the variation may be performed in the order in which the entered ball is entered without considering the type of the first entrance port 64, or when the retained ball exists, Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the first entrance 64 for performing the change with priority is provided. When a plurality of first entrance openings 64 are provided, the jackpot winning probability and the selection ratio of each large jackpot type may be changed according to the type of the first entrance opening 64.

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of a special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates a jackpot type (“normal jackpot”, “hour saving jackpot A”) if the jackpot is a jackpot. , "Hour-saving jackpot B", "special jackpot A", "special jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot A" to "probable variable jackpot H").

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), the display of the special symbol (first symbol) is changed and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 with the trigger as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. Columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is any of “normal jackpot”, “hour jackpot A”, “hour jackpot B”, “special jackpot A”, or “special jackpot B”, the even number “0, The variable display in which the main symbols to which "2, 4, 6, 8" is added is performed. In addition, in the case of “probably variable jackpot A”, “probably variable jackpot E” to “probably variable jackpot H”, fluctuations in which the main symbols to which odd numbers “1, 3, 5, 9” other than “7” are added are aligned. When the display is performed and if the "probable jackpot B" to "probable jackpot D" (that is, the 16 round probable jackpot that is most advantageous for the player), the main symbol with the odd number "7" is added. A uniform fluctuation display is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize the jackpot type only by checking the aligned main symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and a lower two-thirds is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (retained balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the big hit is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character is displayed. And an announcement performance is performed.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball in the 1st ball entrance 64 might be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, but three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed when a ball passes through the second entrance 67, is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67, a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" are alternately lit as the second symbol. A variable display is performed. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the pachinko machine 10 activates the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 for a predetermined time. It is configured so as to be in a state (opened), and as a result, the ball easily enters the first entrance hole 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and illuminated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. You. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the plurality of lamps on and off in the second symbol display device 83, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and the number of passing balls at the second entrance 67 is three or less, or five or more. (For example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the result of the drawing is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a normally closed is closed for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse, until ten balls are won, or until 0.5 seconds elapse, (Until 10 wins).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated a number of times corresponding to the type of big hit. The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203, a register 210 for temporarily storing data necessary for reading and writing when reading various data from the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 and writing various data to the RAM 203, and an interrupt circuit And various circuits such as a timer circuit and a data transmission / reception circuit. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c are stored. , A fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a game result setting table 202e, a state setting table 202f, a big hit end setting table 202g, and a big hit end clear table 202h.

  The first random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a large hit determination value of a first random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details of the first random number table 202a will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 6B) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type is set for each big hit type. The details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described later together with the description of the first hit type counter C2.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 6C) is a data table in which hit values of ordinary symbols are stored. The details of the second random number table 202c will be described later together with the description of the second random number counter C4.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is set for each display mode. In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol jackpot determination result, the game state, and the like are defined. For example, it is a table for selecting a fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit or a table for selecting a fluctuation pattern at the time of coming off. Also, there are a plurality of tables for selecting the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit, and the table selected for each big hit type is different. Further, there are a plurality of tables for selecting a variation pattern at the time of departure. For example, a table which is selected only after the end of the big hit is provided. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  In the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7), when a jackpot is won, the setting values such as the setting of the stop symbol indicating the jackpot and the operation pattern of the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a during the jackpot are displayed. It is a data table defined for each jackpot type. The game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7) is stored in the ROM 202 in the range of addresses "19D8H" to "1A2BH", and each address stores one byte of data. In the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7), the number (determination value number) of the determination values (random number values) of each jackpot type, the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs 37a (the number of display symbols), and the special symbol The information indicating the stop symbol (stop symbol information), the operation pattern of the special winning opening (large open mouth) 65a (large open mouth pattern), and the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d are selected. (Table selection information) indicating which one of a plurality of tables is selected for use in determining a variation pattern, and information (offset 1, offset 2) for determining a game state after a jackpot has ended. ). In FIG. 7, the address of the ROM 202 in which each data is specified is described in parentheses, but the upper byte of the address of the ROM 202 is omitted, and only the lower byte is described.

  In the pachinko machine 10, based on the winning of the big hit, the above setting values corresponding to the type of the winning big hit are stored in the various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 7) of the RAM 203 from the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7). 11). The details of the various setting value storage areas 203e will be described later. Then, based on the set values stored in the various set value storage area 203e, the MPU 201 performs various controls related to a change pattern effect that becomes a big hit and a big hit. In addition, in the various set value storage area 203e (see FIG. 11), in addition to a storage area for storing set values related to the game, offset 1 and offset 2 defined in the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7) are stored. An offset value storage area for storing an offset value calculated based on the offset value is provided. This offset value is a value used to set the game state after the end of the jackpot, and will be described in detail later. However, in the game result set value acquisition processing (see FIG. 17), the offset 1 and the offset 2 are referred to. It is a value calculated by:

  Specifically, in the big hit end process (see FIG. 26) executed when it is determined that the big hit end timing is reached, various setting values relating to the game state after the big hit end (whether or not to set the special symbol high probability state or not) Are set from the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8) and set in the various setting value storage areas 203e. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the random number value (counter value) itself acquired in accordance with the ball entry (starting winning) into the first ball entry port 64 continues to be held until the end of the jackpot, and the random number is counted. The game state after the end of the jackpot is not determined based on the numerical value (counter value), but the random number value (counter value) obtained with the ball entry (start winning) into the first entrance 64. Only the offset value selected based on the large hit is held.

  Here, when the random number value of the jackpot is held during the fluctuation pattern production at the time of the jackpot winning or during the subsequent jackpot state, the jackpot random number is read out by the unauthorized player, and the jackpot is won. A random value may be specified. Therefore, the timing at which the specified random number value appears is analyzed, and there is a possibility that the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the acquired random number value (counter value) is converted into an offset value and held until the end of the jackpot, and the game state after the end of the jackpot is set based on the offset value. With such a configuration, it is possible to limit the period in which the random number value itself serving as the special symbol jackpot is held to a short period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a random number value which becomes a jackpot of a special symbol to be obtained illegally from the outside, so that the timing at which the random number value which becomes a jackpot appears is analyzed, and a fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing is performed. Can be suppressed. Specifically, by setting the analyzed timing on a so-called hanging substrate, acquiring a random number at a timing when a random number value to be a big hit appears, and suppressing a fraudulent act of performing control so as to judge the success or failure of the big hit. Can be.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values relating to the game state after the end of the jackpot (set values indicating whether or not to be in a high probability state of a special symbol, a time-saving period of an ordinary symbol, etc.) are set to the jackpot winning. In this case, the offset value is not held during the fluctuation pattern effect at the time of the hit or during the subsequent jackpot state, but only the offset value indicating the storage position of various setting values in the state setting table 202f is held. . Rather than providing a storage area for temporarily storing all of the various setting values in the RAM 203, it is sufficient to provide an area for holding the offset value, so that the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. Can be.

  Next, the state setting table 202f of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. The state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8) is a table in which a game state that can be shifted after the end of the jackpot is defined for each offset value, and when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1207: Yes). Is a data table that is referred to in setting the game state after the end of the big hit in the big hit end processing (S1208) executed at the end of the game.

  The state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8) is stored in the range of addresses 1AD4H to 1AF3H of the ROM 202, and one byte of data is stored in each address. The state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8) includes information indicating whether to shift to the special symbol high-probability state after the end of the big hit (special lottery state), and shifts to the normal symbol time saving state after the end of the big hit. The information indicating whether or not to make it (normal symbol state), the time-saving period of the normal symbol given after the end of the big hit (the number of time savings), and the change pattern selection table 202d for selecting the mode of the change pattern after the big hit end The number of special symbol lotteries required to switch from the table for use to the table corresponding to the state (the number of times the variable pattern selection table is switched) is defined. In FIG. 8, the address of the ROM 202 in which each data is defined is described in parentheses, but the upper byte of the address of the ROM 202 is omitted, and only the lower byte is described.

  The information indicating whether or not to shift to the normal symbol time reduction state (normal symbol status) includes four types of states: a normal state, a time reduction state 1, a time reduction state 2, and a time reduction state 3. . When the normal state is set as the state of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the ordinary state of the ordinary symbol after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, if any of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3 is set, the state shifts to the normal symbol time saving state after the end of the big hit. In addition to the above, the four states are different from each other in a table used for determining a variation pattern after the number of times of switching the variation pattern selection table has elapsed. That is, when performing a variation pattern effect for deviation, which table is selected from a plurality of tables defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d and used to determine the variation pattern effect differs in each of the above four states. ing.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, based on the winning of the jackpot, the offset values calculated from the offset 1 and the offset 2 defined in the game result setting table 202e are stored in the offset value storage area, At the end of the jackpot, a set value corresponding to the offset value is extracted from the state setting table 202f and stored in the various set value storage area 203e.

  The random number value (counter value) acquired in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 is converted into a form of an offset value, held until the end of the jackpot, and based on the offset value. Since the game state after the end is set, the period in which the random number value itself serving as a special symbol jackpot is held can be limited to a short period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a random number value which becomes a jackpot of a special symbol to be obtained illegally from the outside, so that the timing at which the random number value which becomes a jackpot appears is analyzed, and a fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing is performed. Can be suppressed. Specifically, by setting the analyzed timing on a so-called hanging substrate, acquiring a random number at a timing when a random number value to be a big hit appears, and suppressing a fraudulent act of performing control so as to judge the success or failure of the big hit. Can be.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values (a lottery state of a special symbol, a state of a normal symbol, the number of times of saving, the number of times of changing the change pattern selection table) relating to the game state after the end of the big hit are set before the start of the big hit game. Instead of specifying and holding in advance, only the offset value indicating the storage position of each set value in the state setting table 202f is held, so that the RAM 203 holds the offset until the end of the jackpot. It is enough to provide only a storage area for holding the value. Therefore, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the jackpot end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) and the jackpot end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B) specified in the ROM 202 will be described. These tables are used in the big hit end process (see FIG. 26) to initialize the big hit middle setting values set in various setting value storage areas 203e, which will be described later, and rewrite them into the normal gaming state setting. Is a table in which the control data of the above is defined.

  The big hit end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) is a table stored in the range of addresses 1202H to 1204H of the ROM 202, and one byte of data is stored in each address. Specifically, addresses “1202H” to “1204H” of the ROM 202 include address data indicating a storage location of data to be reset in the various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 7), and the address data. The data for setting the storage location of the indicated data (the data for resetting the set value indicating the big hit) and the data for ending the processing for initializing the gaming state setting area are stored in the order of addresses. I have. Although details will be described later, in the data setting process (see FIG. 27), which is one of the jackpot end processes (see FIG. 26), the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 sets the jackpot end setting table 202g (see FIG. )), The stored data is read out in the order of the addresses in the ROM 202, and the control according to the stored data is executed. Specifically, when the address data is read, the address is set as a data setting destination address. When the set value data (data for resetting the set value) is read, the contents of the address set as the set destination address are reset (that is, “00H” is set to the set destination address). ). Further, when it is determined that the read data is data for terminating the process, the data setting process (see FIG. 27) is terminated.

  Next, the big hit end clear table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. The big hit end clear table 202h is a table stored in the ROM 202 in the range of addresses “1205H” to “1212H”, and each address defines an address of various set value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 11). I have. Although the details will be described later, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), which is one of the jackpot end processes, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores the stored data in the order of the addresses of the ROM 202 from the jackpot end clear table 202h. "00H" (initial value data) is set as a set value at the address indicated by the read stored data (address data). If the data read from the big hit end clear table 202h is “00H”, the zero setting process ends.

  In the big hit end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B), the setting destination addresses of the various setting value storage areas 203e and the setting data (ie, “00H”) for setting the setting destination addresses are defined. In such a configuration, there is a problem that the data amount of the clear table 202h at the end of the big hit increases. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the process of defining only the setting destination address in the big hit end clear table 202h and setting “00H” to the setting destination address is performed by the control program of the MPU 201. Stipulated in Therefore, the data amount of the big hit end clear table 202h can be reduced, so that the data amount stored in the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the data setting process (see FIG. 27) or the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), the control program sets the number of times of setting data in the various setting value storage areas 203e. Is not described, and the processing is not terminated when it is determined that the data setting for the set number of times is completed. Instead, the data “00H” is stored in the big hit end setting table 202g and the big hit end clear table 202h. It is configured to terminate the processing when it is determined that the data has been read out.

  If the number of set values is described in the control program, the control program designer newly counts the number of set values each time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as diversion of the program to another model. It becomes necessary to rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, it takes time and effort to count the set values, and if the designer makes a mistake, the incorrect number of repetitions is specified in the control program, so that the setting at the end of the jackpot is completed normally. And the pachinko machine 10 may malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is only necessary to define “00H” as data at the end of the jackpot end setting table 202g and the jackpot end clearing table 202h, so that when designing the control program, The possibility that a designer makes a mistake can be reduced. Therefore, the setting of the data at the end of the big hit can be executed more reliably based on the control program, and the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  Next, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters and flags for controlling the processing of the main control device 110, a storage area for storing set values, and the like. Here, the processing of the main control device 110 includes a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a third symbol display. This is main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of display in the device 81.

  First, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second random number counter C4 is used for the normal symbol lottery, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 13), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance port. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any one of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number which is a big hit of the special symbol is set by a first random number table 202a (see FIG. 6A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. If the value matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and for a high probability of a special symbol having a higher probability of being a big hit than the low probability. And the number of random hits included in each of them is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for a special symbol with a high probability and the first random number table 202a2 for a special symbol with a low probability (not shown) are provided by the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 149). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 149 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 149), the counter returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first one The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there are three random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random number value “7, 107, 282” is the first random number value for the low probability. It is stored in the hit random number table 202a. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of the random numbers is three and the total number of the random numbers to be the big hit is three, so the probability of the big hit of the special symbol is “1/100”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are thirty random numbers which are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the value is “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”are first random number tables for high probability. 202a. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300 and the total number of jackpot random numbers is 30, so the probability of the special symbol jackpot is "1/10".

  In this embodiment, the random number value of the big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability and the random number of the big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability are stored. In order to prevent the values from being duplicated with the numerical values, a random number value for each jackpot is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as the random number value of the jackpot, the timing at which the value appears is analyzed, and the jackpot is illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. There is a possibility that it becomes easier. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random number value to be a big hit is changed depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state or the special symbol low probability state). Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value which is a special symbol jackpot to be predicted, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 149. Then, as shown in FIG. 6B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 19” is “normal big hit”. When the value is “20-29”, the jackpot type is “hour saving jackpot A”, and when the value is “30-39”, the jackpot type is “hour saving jackpot B”. When the value is “40 to 69”, the jackpot type is “special jackpot A”, and when the value is “70 to 97”, the jackpot type is “special jackpot B”.

  Furthermore, when the random number value is “98,99”, the jackpot type is “probable variable jackpot A”, and when the value is “100 to 102”, the jackpot type is “probable variable jackpot B”. Is "103-105", the jackpot type is "probable jackpot C", and if the value is "106-113", the jackpot type is "probable jackpot D". When the value is "114 to 129", the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot E", and when the value is "130 to 145", the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot F". If it is "146,147", the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot G", and if the value is "148,149", the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot H".

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment uses the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2 to determine the thirteen types of hit types (normal jackpot, hourly jackpot A, hourly jackpot B, extra jackpot A, and extra jackpot B). , The jackpot A to the jackpot H) are determined. In addition, the random number value for determining the special jackpot type from the value of the first hit type counter C2 (random value) is set by a special symbol jackpot type table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99) and "reach other than front and rear out" (e.g., in the range of 90-97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than before and after the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the stop type selection counter C3 value (random number value) is set in a stop type selection table (not shown). This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and the range of the random number value set for each type of stop according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely off”. In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 98, 99 and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “reach out of front and back” or “reach other than front and rear out”. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 79, which is a small low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, a lot of reach displays with a long rendering time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach out of order” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 6A) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided within.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, “variation (for long time)”, “variation (for short time)”, various types of “normal reach”, “variation of super reach”, “variation” Various types of "special reach" are stipulated, and as the fluctuation pattern for big hits, various "normal hits", various "super reach", and various types of "special reach" are specified. , Various "shared super reach", various "shared special reach".

  As described above, the variation pattern selection table 202d is composed of a plurality of tables according to the state of the pachinko machine 10. For example, when a jackpot is won, the table to be selected is different depending on the jackpot type, and which table is used for selecting the variation pattern is determined in the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7) for each jackpot type. It is determined according to the specified table selection information. If the table for selecting the variation pattern is different, for example, among the various types of "winning super reach", the type of "winning super reach" that is easily selected by a specific jackpot type or the "winning super reach" selected only by a specific jackpot type A type of “reach” can be provided. Therefore, the jackpot type can be predicted from the type of the fluctuation pattern, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Also, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the table used to select the variation pattern is different depending on whether the state of the ordinary symbol is the normal state or the time saving state 1 to 3 It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the current game state can be predicted from the type of the fluctuation pattern.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of being performed, and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a hit for the ordinary symbol is set by a second random number table (see FIG. 6C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. If the value of the random number matches the value of the winning set in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. The second random number table 202c is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the symbol is in the normal state) and a high probability (normal symbol) in which the probability of hitting the symbol is higher than the low probability. ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 6C, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers which are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "5-28". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 24 out of 240 in the total number of random numbers, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has the low probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The ROM 202 stores a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 13). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 24).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 10, a stack area in which the contents of the register 210 of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register of the register 210 are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 24), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 23). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , The NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203d, and various settings. It has a value storage area 203e and a probability change flag 203f.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4th reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the ball wins in the first entrance 64 (start winning), and as soon as the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 are obtained in accordance with the starting winning, the jackpot lottery of the original special symbol is performed. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. As described above, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning. The prediction is described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. It should be noted that the various types of information correspond to pass / fail, stop type, change pattern, and the like.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the prize information command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts the success / failure, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command, and uses them as prize information as the prize information storage area of the RAM 223. 223a.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding area). Of the vacant areas in the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winning prize stored in the other reserved area is stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases by 1 to a maximum value of four. They are added (see S604 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 14).

  The value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 18 and S605 in FIG. 20). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to display the variable display reserved ball retained in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of retained balls of the variable display, which is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is the actual number of retained balls of the variable display retained by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has shifted, the shift can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d counts the number of waiting balls (the number of times of waiting) of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. The counter counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S804 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S705 in FIG. 20).

  If the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67 and the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S805 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b. No (S803: No in FIG. 21).

  The various setting value storage area 203e is a storage area in which various setting values, flags, counters, and the like for executing main processing of the pachinko machine 10 are stored. The MPU 201 performs control based on data stored in various setting value storage areas 203e. The various setting value storage area 203e will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the various setting value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 11, the various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 11) correspond to the range of addresses “F000H” to “F0FFH” of the RAM 203. In the various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 11), the firing control signal setting value storage area assigned to the address “F000H” in the RAM 203 stores a setting value for controlling the firing of a ball. The launch of a ball to the game area is controlled based on a set value stored in this area.

  The display LED setting area assigned to the address “F009H” of the RAM 203 is a storage area in which the setting value of the lighting pattern for lighting the display LED is stored, and based on the setting value stored in this area. To light the display LED.

  The test signal setting area 1 and the test signal setting area 2 respectively assigned to the addresses “F01DH” and “F01EH” are storage areas for storing setting values for outputting various test signals. As the test signal, for example, there are a signal for performing an operation test of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and a signal for performing an operation test at the time of a big hit. Since the signal is a test signal, a setting is made such that no signal is output while the player is playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 (that is, “00H” is set as the set value in the test signal setting areas 1 and 2).

  The maximum round number setting area assigned to the address “F030H” is an area for setting the number of rounds of a big hit. For example, when the number of jackpot rounds, such as the probability variable jackpot E, is won in the jackpot type of two rounds, “02H” is set as the set value, and the number of jackpot rounds, such as the special jackpot A and the special jackpot B, is set. When the jackpot is won in eight rounds, the set value is "08H". When the number of rounds of the jackpot, such as a normal jackpot or a time-saving jackpot A, is 16 jackpots, the set value is "10H". Is set.

  The game state setting area assigned to the address “F035H” of the RAM 203 is a storage area in which a set value indicating the current game state is stored. For example, if the stored set value is “01H” When the special symbol is changing, "02H" indicates that the special symbol is being confirmed and displayed, and "03H" indicates that the jackpot is being hit and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is being closed. If it is "04H", it indicates that the jackpot is being hit and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is being opened. If “00H”, the special symbol is in a state other than the above (that is, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a state from the end of the big hit to the start of the change of the special symbol, or in a state where there is no reserved ball). After a lapse of a certain period of time).

  The jackpot flag assigned to the address “F090H” is a flag indicating whether or not the game is currently in a jackpot state (special game state), and if it is on (ie, the stored data is “01H”). If it is off (that is, if the stored data is “00H”), the state other than the special symbol jackpot (that is, the special symbol) is shown. (Fluctuating state, demonstration state, etc.). The storage areas allocated to the following addresses “F091H” to “F094H” are areas for setting data read from the state setting table 202f of the ROM 202.

  First, the probable change state flag assigned to the address “F091H” is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is currently undergoing probable change, and if it is on (ie, the stored data is “01H”). If so, it indicates that the special symbol is being changed, and if it is off (ie, if the stored data is “00H”), it indicates that the special symbol is in a low probability state. .

  The time-saving state flag assigned to the address “F092H” indicates whether or not the time of the normal symbol is being reduced, and is a set value for designating a table for selecting the mode of the variation pattern at the time of departure. Is stored. If the flag is “00H”, it indicates that the symbol is in the normal state, and if the flag is “01H”, it indicates that the symbol is in the time saving state 1 of the symbol, and if the flag is “02H”. If the flag is "03H", it indicates that it is the time reduction state 3 of the ordinary symbol. As described above, the time saving states 1 to 3 of the ordinary symbols differ in that the tables used to select the variation pattern when the variation is lost after the number of times the variation pattern selection table has been switched are different from each other. . As described above, the tables are all defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d.

  The time-saving state counter assigned to the address “F093H” shifts to the special symbol low-probability state after the end of the big hit, and when the normal symbol shifts to the time-saving state, how many times the normal symbol has been reduced. This is a counter that indicates whether or not it is running. When the special symbol is shifted to the high probability state after the end of the big hit, the time saving state of the ordinary symbol continues until the next jackpot is won, but the time saving state counter is 0 regardless of the number of lotteries of the special symbol. is there. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the probability change state flag is ON or the value of the time reduction state counter is 1 or more, the control of the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is executed.

  The change selection state counter assigned to the address “F094H” is a counter that indicates the number of remaining special symbol lotteries until the table for selecting the change pattern effect is switched to another table. If the value of this counter is 1 or more, a variation pattern selection table dedicated to after the jackpot is selected as a table for selecting a variation pattern at the time of disconnection. On the other hand, when the value of the variation selection state counter is 0, the variation pattern is determined from a table corresponding to the gaming state indicated by the time reduction state flag.

  The offset value storage area assigned to the address “F095H” is a storage area for storing the offset value, and the set value after the jackpot is read from the state setting table 202f based on the stored offset value. , Are set to addresses “F091H” to “F094H” of the RAM 203, respectively. This offset value is calculated from each of the offset 1 and offset 2 read from the game result table 202e when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit in the lottery, and is stored in the offset value storage area. In addition, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) executed after the setting value is read out from the state setting table 202f and the setting is completed, the initial value “00H” is overwritten.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various random numbers (counter values) obtained when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning) are converted into the form of an offset value and the offset value is stored. Since the game state is stored in the area and the game state after the end of the big hit is set based on the offset value, the period in which the random number value itself as the big hit of the special symbol is held is limited to a short period. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a random number value which is a special symbol jackpot to be illegally acquired from the outside. Therefore, it is possible to analyze a timing at which a random number value that becomes a jackpot is analyzed, and to suppress an illegal act of illegally assigning a jackpot based on the analyzed timing. Specifically, by setting the analyzed timing on a so-called hanging substrate, acquiring a random number at a timing when a random number value to be a big hit appears, and suppressing a fraudulent act of performing control so as to judge the success or failure of the big hit. Can be. The various random numbers (counter values) refer to the first random number counter C1 and the first random number counter C1 stored in each counter buffer of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning). It means the values of the hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the like.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values (special symbol lottery state, ordinary symbol state, time savings, fluctuations) to be set at the addresses “F091H” to “F094H” as the game state after the end of the big hit The number of times of switching the pattern selection table) is not specified and held in advance before the start of the jackpot game, but only an offset value indicating a storage position of various set values in the state setting table 202f is held. With the configuration, it is sufficient to provide only a storage area for one byte of the offset value storage area in the RAM 203. Therefore, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently.

  The large open mouth setting area assigned to the address “F096H” is a storage area in which a set value indicating the open pattern of the special winning opening (large open mouth) 65a during the big hit is stored. (If the jackpot flag is on). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, five types of setting values of “00H” to “04H” are provided, and when the setting value is “00H”, the round hits 16 rounds, and when the setting value is “01H”, the round hits 8 rounds. , "02H", a 16-round short open jackpot (a 16-round jackpot in which a specific winning opening (large open port) 65a is opened for a maximum of 0.5 seconds in each round), "03H" a 2-round jackpot, “04H” corresponds to two round short open jackpots (two round jackpots in which the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is opened for a maximum of 0.5 seconds in each round).

  The stop symbol code information storage area assigned to the address “F097H” is an area for setting the information on the stop symbol of the special symbol based on the result of the lottery of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is off, a stop symbol code indicating a stop symbol corresponding to the departure is set, and when the lottery result is a hit, a stop symbol code corresponding to the big hit type is read from the game result setting table 202e. Issued and set. Then, at the end of the change of the special symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the set value set in the stop symbol code information storage area is definitely displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

  Addresses “F09FH” to “F0FFH” are unused areas, and data stored in these areas is fixed at “00H”. It should be noted that various setting values are assigned to addresses other than those described above in the various setting value storage area 203e. Although description is omitted, for example, various counters such as a winning counter for counting the number of balls winning the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and a time for switching display of a normal symbol in a fluctuation effect of a normal symbol are measured. Various timers such as a normal symbol display switching timer are assigned.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to centrally store various set values, counters, timers, and the like in the various set value storage areas 203e where the upper byte of the address of the RAM 203 is F0H. A ring buffer for storing commands (for example, a fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command) to be output to the sound lamp control device 113, etc., a special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol retaining ball number storage area 203b, a stack area For example, the upper byte of the address in the RAM 203 is stored at an address other than “F0H” (for example, an address whose upper byte is “F1H”).

  Next, the register 210 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The register 210 is used to temporarily store address data and set value data and to perform arithmetic processing on the stored set values when reading data from the ROM 202 or the RAM 203 or writing set values to the RAM 203. It is. As shown in FIG. 12, a register 210 includes an accumulator 210a capable of executing an arithmetic operation on stored data and general-purpose registers 210b1, 210b2, 210c1, 210c2, 210d1, and 210d2 capable of storing address data and set value data. And a flag register 210e for storing various flags, and an address holding register 210f for storing the upper byte (F0H) of the address of the various setting value storage area 203e as a fixed value. Note that the accumulator 210a can also be used for temporarily storing data, like the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2.

  Each of the registers provided in the register 210 is configured to be able to hold 1-byte data. The general-purpose register 210b1 and the general-purpose register 210b2, the general-purpose register 210c1 and the general-purpose register 210c2, and the general-purpose register 210d1 and the general-purpose register 210d2 can be used as a pair. That is, the configuration is such that a total of 2 bytes of data can be stored in each pair of registers. As the data of 2 bytes, for example, address data of the ROM 202, address data of the RAM 203, and the like correspond.

  In the flag register 210e, a different flag is provided for each bit of 1 byte. The provided flag is, for example, a zero flag that is turned off if the operation result after executing the instruction is a value other than zero, and turned on if the operation result is zero, or data stored in any of various general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2. There is provided a load flag or the like that is turned off if the data is other than "00H" and turned on if it is "00H".

  Hereinafter, control when reading and writing data will be described. Here, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with various instructions for executing various controls of the main control device 110, and reads and writes data by using one of the various instructions. Performed using Specifically, for example, a transfer instruction is provided that specifies a read source and a setting destination, and transfers data stored in the transfer source to the setting destination.

  In this transfer instruction, at least one of the reading source and the setting destination needs to specify the accumulator 210a provided in the register 210 or any of the general-purpose registers (general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2). is there. Therefore, for example, when reading data specified at the address “1ADAH” of the ROM 202 and storing the read data at the address “F093H” of the RAM 203, it is necessary to perform data transfer via the general-purpose register 210b1, for example. Specifically, first, the address “1ADAH” is read from, the general-purpose register 210b1 is set as the setting destination, and the data specified by the address “1ADAH” is stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 using a transfer instruction. Then, with the general-purpose register 210b1 as a read source and the address “F093H” as a setting destination, a transfer instruction is performed again to set the data stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 to the address “F093H”. By performing such control, the data specified at the address “1ADAH” of the ROM 202 can be transferred to the address “F093H” of the RAM 203 via the general-purpose register 210b1.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a 2-byte read instruction (load instruction) is provided as a transfer instruction that can be accepted by the MPU 201. The two-byte read instruction (load instruction) is an instruction for reading data specified at a specified read source and transferring the data to a specified setting destination. In the two-byte read command, an address of the ROM 202 or the RAM 203 can be specified as a read source or a setting destination. In this case, it is necessary to specify both the upper byte and the lower byte of the address of the ROM 202 or the RAM 203.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, similarly to the two-byte read instruction (load instruction), the one-byte read instruction, which is an instruction to read data specified in the specified read source and transfer the data to the specified destination, is used. Instructions are provided. The difference between this one-byte read instruction and the two-byte read instruction (load instruction) is that it is used when data is read from a specific storage area or when data is transferred to a specific storage area. Note that the specific storage area refers to a storage area in which the fixed value data stored in the address holding register 210f is used as the upper byte of the address. As described above, since “F0H” is stored in the address holding register 210f, the one-byte read instruction is executed in an area whose address is in the range of “F000H” to “F0FFH”, that is, the various setting value storage areas of the RAM 203. It is used when data is transferred to the memory 203e or when data is read from the various setting value storage areas 203e.

  The 1-byte read instruction is defined to include the meaning that the upper byte of the address reads and writes from the area of “F0H”. Therefore, when the read source or the setting destination address is specified, the upper byte of the address is specified. It is only necessary to omit the bytes and write only the lower byte of the address in the program, which is advantageous in that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Here, when performing various settings, such as a setting at the start of the change, a setting during the big hit, and a setting after the big hit, data is set in the various set value storage area 203e. For this reason, in the control program, the process of setting some data in the various setting value storage areas 203e is frequently described. If all these settings are described by a 2-byte read instruction, there is a problem that the program capacity increases. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the MPU 201 is configured to be able to read the above-mentioned 1-byte read command, and all the upper bytes of the addresses of the various setting value storage areas 203e are “F0H”. Thus, the data storage position of the RAM 203 is adjusted. Thereby, a command for setting data in the various setting value storage areas 203e where the setting process is frequently performed in the game by the pachinko machine 10 can be described by a 1-byte read command in the control program. Therefore, when there are a plurality of upper bytes of the address of the various setting value storage area 203e (for example, some data is stored in an area where the upper byte of the address is “F0H”, and The size of the control program can be reduced as compared with the case where the control program is stored in the area “F1H”.

  Here, the difference between the 2-byte read instruction and the 1-byte read instruction will be described more specifically, taking as an example a case where the data stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 is stored at the address “F093H” of the RAM 203.

  In the 2-byte read instruction, data indicating the general-purpose register 210b1 is specified as a read source, and an address “F093H” is specified as a setting destination, thereby setting data stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 to an address “F093H”. can do. In other words, in one transfer instruction, it is necessary to describe a total of 3 bytes of data of 1-byte data indicating the general-purpose register 210b1 and “F093H” which is 2-byte address data in the program.

  On the other hand, when the one-byte read instruction is used, the data indicating the general-purpose register 210b1 is specified as the read source in common with the two-byte read instruction, but as the setting destination, the lower byte of the address “F093H” is used. The difference is that only certain “93H” needs to be designated. In other words, in a single transfer instruction, it is sufficient to describe 2-byte data of 1-byte data indicating the general-purpose register 210b1 and 1-byte address data "93H". The amount of program description can be reduced by one byte. Further, in the various set value storage area 203e, various set values related to the game, such as the set value related to the launch of the ball, the set value related to the LED 37a, the set value of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the like are stored. Data is frequently read and written. Therefore, in the control program of the pachinko machine 10, a description of a transfer instruction that specifies any address in the various setting value storage area 203e as a read source or a setting destination frequently appears. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced by using a one-byte read instruction instead of a two-byte read instruction for all of these transfer instructions.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the various setting value storage areas 203e in which data is frequently set are configured so that the upper byte of the address in the RAM 203 is within the range of "F0H". Accordingly, “F0H” is selected as the read source or the setting destination upper address when the one-byte read instruction is executed in accordance with this, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, the address of the various setting value storage area 203e is set to “FF00H” to “FFFFH”, and in accordance with this, “FFH” is set as the read source when executing the 1-byte read instruction or the upper address of the setting destination. May be selected. When the upper address of the read source or the setting destination is changed to “FFH”, “FFH” may be stored as fixed value data in the address holding register 202f.

  In addition, for example, the upper byte of the frequently read address of the ROM 202 is set as a read source or an upper address of a setting destination when a 1-byte read instruction is executed (that is, a fixed value is set in the address holding register 202f). (Set as data). Examples of the address that is frequently read include, for example, the address of the first random number table 202a which is referred to each time a special symbol is drawn, and the game result setting table 202e which is referred each time a special symbol is determined to be a big hit. Address.

  In the above example, when the upper byte of the address of the game result setting table 202e is stored as fixed value data, the game result setting table 202e is stored in the ROM 202 at addresses "19D1H" to "1A2BH". When reading data, there are a case where the upper byte of the address is "19H" and a case where it is "1AH". On the other hand, since only one-byte data can be stored in the address holding register 202f, only one of “19H” and “1AH” can be stored in the address holding register 202f. On the other hand, the address of the ROM 202 in which the game result setting table 202e is defined may be shifted, and all data may be defined in a range where the upper byte of the address is common.

  Further, the configuration is such that a set value is set in a storage area in which the upper byte of the address is different according to the game state to be changed, and the target area when executing the 1-byte transfer instruction is changed according to the game state. May be configured. For example, among the various set value storage areas 203e, the set value for setting the gaming state during the jackpot is such that the upper byte of the address is stored in a range of “F0H” and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set. The set value is stored in a range where the upper byte of the address is “F1H”. When setting the gaming state during the jackpot, the fixed value “F0H” is overwritten in the address holding register 202f, and data is read / written from the area where the upper byte of the address is “F0H” in the 1-byte read instruction. What is necessary is just to set it. On the other hand, when setting the gaming state after the jackpot at the end of the jackpot, the fixed value “F1H” is overwritten in the address holding register 202f, and data is read / written from the area where the upper byte of the address is “F1H” in the 1-byte read instruction. What is necessary is just to set so that it can do. As a result, the data to be stored in the various setting value storage areas 203e increases, and even when all the data cannot be accommodated in the area where the upper byte of the address is the same, the one-byte read instruction is used. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a continuous announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern table 222a that defines a plurality of variation pattern effect modes to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When a variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is received, the corresponding variation pattern mode is selected from variation pattern table 222a. The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, and a stop type selection flag 223d.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 wins a start, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning is obtained. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various kinds of information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, change pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and the prize information is used as the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area with the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. A counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standbys) of the variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1808 in FIG. 31). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1802 in FIG. 31), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 32). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1805 in FIG. 31), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 32). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command, and the set stop type is displayed for display. The display control device 114 is notified by the stop type command.

  The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Effects) and the like.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), A start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the ball passes through the second entrance 67 through the through gate. The processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and fires the ball on condition that the hitting switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, the special symbol change process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: S204). No), this process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball count command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1101) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After the command of the number of reserved balls is set by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a big hit determination process is performed for performing a lottery to determine whether or not a special symbol is a big hit based on the data shifted to the execution area (S208). The big hit determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a jackpot setting process (S308) described later with reference to FIG. 16 or a loss setting process (S309) described later with reference to FIG.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S211). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), the start of the jackpot according to the jackpot type is set (S212).

  In the processing of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving state counter stored in the various setting value storage area 203e is 1 or more (S213). If the value of the time reduction status counter is 1 or more (S213: Yes), the value of the time reduction status counter is decremented by 1 (S214), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction state counter is 0 (S213: No), the process of S214 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, the jackpot determination process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the jackpot determination process (S208). The big hit determination process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters, a lottery of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol loss” is performed (whether or not), and fluctuations performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining an effect pattern of an effect (a fluctuation effect pattern).

  In the jackpot determination process, first, a first random number table 202a2 (not shown) for low probability is selected from the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit. (S301). Thereafter, the probable change state flag stored in the various set value storage area 203e is read out (S302), and it is determined whether or not the probable change state flag indicates a high probability state of the special symbol (S303).

  As a result of the processing in S303, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the high probability state (S303: Yes), the first random number table 202a1 for the high probability is obtained from the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202. (Not shown), a new table is set instead of the first random number table 202a2 for low probability as a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit (S304), and the process proceeds to S305. I do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the high probability state (ie, the special symbol is in the low probability state) as a result of the process of S303 (S303: No), the process of S304 is skipped and the process proceeds to S305. I do.

In the process of S305, the value of the first random number counter C1 is read out from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 (S305), and the read value of the first random number counter C1 is read from S1.
A comparison is made with a table (table of comparison source) for determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit set in the processing of S301 or S304 (S306).

  As described above, in the first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for the high probability time, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78" is set as a random number value which is a jackpot of a special symbol. , 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 " In the first probability random number table 202a2 (not shown) for low probability, three random numbers of "7, 107, 282" are set as the random numbers to be the big hit of the special symbol. In the processing of S306, among these tables, the random number value specified in the table set as the comparison source table is compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 one by one.

  Based on the comparison, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches one of the random numbers specified in the comparison source table (S307). If there is a special jackpot (that is, in the case of a special symbol jackpot), a jackpot setting process for setting the variation pattern at the time of the jackpot and the control during the jackpot is executed (S308), and the process proceeds to S310. I do. On the other hand, when there is no matching random number value in the process of S307 (that is, in the case of the special symbol being out of place), the out-of-offset setting process for setting the mode of the variation pattern at the time of the out-of-out is executed (S309). The process proceeds to S310. The details of the jackpot setting process (S308) and the out-of-match setting process (S309) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, in the process of S310, the various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared (S310), and this process ends. Since various counter values are cleared in the process of S310, even if a big hit occurs, the random number value (counter value) to be a big hit can be cleared before the big hit state is started. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a random number value which becomes a jackpot of a special symbol to be obtained illegally from the outside, so that the timing at which the random number value which becomes a jackpot appears is analyzed, and a fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing is performed. Can be suppressed. Specifically, by setting the analyzed timing on a so-called hanging substrate, acquiring a random number at a timing when a random number value to be a big hit appears, and suppressing a fraudulent act of performing control so as to judge the success or failure of the big hit. Can be. In the present embodiment, various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared during the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 15). However, the present invention is not limited to this. It should be cleared before it is recognized that it becomes. Therefore, for example, a process of clearing the counter buffer may be executed during the fluctuation effect or before the symbol stops.

  In the present embodiment, the first random number table for the low probability state is set once in the process of S301 regardless of whether the special symbol is in the high probability state or not. This is for setting a table for comparison. In other words, if any of the first random number tables (the first random number table 202a1 for the high probability or the first random number table 202a2 for the low probability) is not set, the influence of noise or the like may occur. Even if a problem occurs in which the processing of S303 or S304, which is an intermediate processing, is skipped, the big hit is determined based on the first random number table 202a2 for low probability set at the beginning of the big hit determination processing. Pass / fail can be determined.

  Next, the jackpot setting process (S308) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the big hit setting process is a process for setting the mode of the big hit variation pattern and the control during the big hit.

  In this processing, first, the jackpot flag of the various setting value storage area 203e is set to ON (S401), and thereafter, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the jackpot of the currently won jackpot is obtained. The type is specified (S402). Specifically, the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first big hit type counter C2 is specified based on the first big hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 6B). For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80”, since the counter value is in the range of “70” to “97”, the current big hit type is specified as the special big hit B. Further, for example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “140”, the counter value is in the range of “130” to “145”, and thus the present big hit type is specified as the probability variable big hit F.

  Next, the set value corresponding to the specified jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e of the ROM 202, and the read set value is set in the corresponding storage area of the various set value storage area 203e of the RAM 203 (S403). The process moves to S404. Here, as setting values to be read from the game result setting table 202e and set in the various setting value storage areas 203e, the lighting pattern of the LED 37a (the number of display symbols), information (stop symbol code) indicating the stop symbol of the special symbol, and the like. And information for specifying a table for selecting the mode of the variation pattern from the variation pattern selection table 202d (table selection information), and a control pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (large opening pattern). And the like.

  As described above, when setting value data is read from the ROM 202 and set in the RAM 203, first, the data of the transfer source address and the data of the setting destination address are stored in one of the general-purpose registers of the register 210. Store temporarily. Then, the setting value data read from the ROM 202 based on the data of the stored source address is temporarily stored in one of the general-purpose registers in which the address data is not stored, and then the setting destination address is stored. The setting value is transferred (set) to the address of the RAM 203 indicated by the data of (1). In the process of S403, the transfer control via the register 210 is repeated by the number of set value data to be transferred.

  In the process of S402, the jackpot type is specified from the random number value (counter value), and in the process of S403, various setting values are determined based on the specified jackpot type. And various setting values may be directly associated with each other and defined. That is, a table that defines the range of the random number value (counter value) and the corresponding various setting values may be provided in the ROM 202, and the setting value may be directly specified from the random number value with reference to this table. .

  In the process of S404, the mode of the variation pattern is selected by reading the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and comparing it with a table specified based on the table selection information (S404). Then, a variation pattern command based on the selected variation pattern is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S405). The fluctuation pattern command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201.

  After the setting of the fluctuation pattern, at the end of the jackpot, a game result setting acquisition process for acquiring and setting offset information as information for setting a game state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S406). This processing ends.

  Subsequently, the game result setting acquisition process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. The game result setting acquisition process (S406) is a process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and is a process for holding the offset value based on the result of the lottery of the special symbol in the RAM 203.

  In the game result setting acquisition process (S406), first, the value of offset 1 based on the current jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e and set as an offset value (S501). Here, "set as an offset value" means that the value of offset 1 or offset 2 read from the game result setting table 202e of the ROM 202 is temporarily stored in the accumulator 210a. In the processing of S501, the value of offset 1 is not stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2 but is stored in the accumulator 210a because of the offset stored in the processing of S506 and the processing of S507 described later. This is for performing arithmetic processing on the value.

  Similarly, the value of offset 2 based on the current jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e and stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2 (S502). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state counter is 0 (that is, whether or not the current jackpot has been won during the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol given after winning the various time reduction jackpots). (S503).

  In the processing of S503, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter is not 0 (S503: No), the value of offset 2 stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2 is stored in the accumulator 210a. The existing data is overwritten (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. On the other hand, in the process of S503, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter is 0 (S503: Yes), the process of S504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S505.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types (special jackpot A, special jackpot B) that shift to different gaming states after the jackpot is completed depending on whether or not to win during the time saving state of the ordinary symbol given after various time saving jackpots. ) Is provided. Specifically, if the special jackpot A or the special jackpot B is won during the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol given after the various time-saving jackpots, the state shifts to the special symbol high probability state after the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, if the special jackpot A or the special jackpot B is won in any other state, the state shifts to the special symbol low-probability state and the normal symbol time-saving state after the end of the jackpot. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the offset 1 or the offset 2 is defined in association with each of the two game states that can be shifted after the end of the jackpot.

  In the process of S505, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state (S505). If it is determined that the special symbol is in the high probability state (S505: Yes), the offset stored in the accumulator 210a is determined. An arithmetic process for exchanging the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits of the value is performed (S506), and the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, in the processing of S505, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the high probability state (that is, the special symbol is in the low probability state) (S505: No), the processing of S506 is skipped and the processing shifts to the processing of S507. I do.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a jackpot type (hour-saving jackpot A) in which the number of times of saving of the ordinary symbol given after the end of the jackpot is different depending on whether or not to win during the special symbol high probability state. More specifically, if the time-saving jackpot A is won during the special symbol high-probability state, the normal symbol time-saving state is set from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery is performed 30 times. When the time-saving jackpot A is won during the special symbol low probability state, the normal symbol time saving state is set only after the jackpot is completed and until the special symbol lottery is performed 20 times. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the upper 4 bits or lower 4 bits of the offset value are defined in association with each of the two game states that can be shifted after the end of the jackpot.

  In the processing of S507, the lower 4 bits of the offset value stored in the accumulator 210a are extracted and stored in the offset value storage area of the various setting value storage areas 203e provided in the RAM 203 (S507). finish. Here, "extracting the lower 4 bits" means to take the logical product of the data stored in the accumulator 210a and "0FH". Regardless of the value of the upper 4 bits of the data stored in the accumulator 210a, the upper 4 bits become "0H" (that is, "0000B") by performing a logical AND operation with "0FH" (that is, "00001111B"). )), Only the lower 4 bits of the data stored in the accumulator 210a remain.

  The offset value stored in the offset value storage area of the various setting value storage area 203e in the process of S507 is retained until the jackpot end timing, and the jackpot end process (FIG. 26) is a process for setting the state after the jackpot end. ) Is used to determine data to be read from the state setting table 202f.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a random number value (counter value) acquired in accordance with the ball entry (start winning) into the first entrance hole 64 is converted into an offset value and stored in the offset value storage area. In addition, since the game state after the end of the jackpot is set based on the offset value, the period in which the random number value itself serving as the jackpot of the special symbol is held can be limited to a short period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a random number value which becomes a jackpot of a special symbol to be obtained illegally from the outside, so that the timing at which the random number value which becomes a jackpot appears is analyzed, and a fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing is performed. Can be suppressed. Specifically, by setting the analyzed timing on a so-called hanging substrate, acquiring a random number at a timing when a random number value to be a big hit appears, and suppressing a fraudulent act of performing control so as to judge the success or failure of the big hit. Can be.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values to be set at the addresses F091H to F094H as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot (special symbol lottery state, ordinary symbol state, number of working hours, variation pattern selection table switching) The number of times is not specified and held in advance before the start of the big hit game, but only the offset value indicating the storage position of various setting values in the state setting table 202f is held. It is sufficient to provide only a storage area for one byte of the offset value storage area in the RAM 203. Therefore, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of offset 1 is stored in the accumulator 210a in the processing of S501, and the value of offset 2 is stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2 in the processing of S502. However, the value of offset 1 and the value of offset 2 are stored in any pair register (general-purpose register 210b1 and general-purpose register 210b2, general-purpose register 210c1 and general-purpose register 210c2, or general-purpose register 210d1 and general-purpose register 210d2). It may be stored in a lump. Then, when it is determined that the time-saving state counter is 0 in the processing of S503 (S503: Yes), the value of the offset 1 stored in the pair register may be stored in the accumulator 210a.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the offset 2 is temporarily stored in any of the general-purpose registers before the value of the time-saving state counter is determined to be 0. If it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter is not 0 (S503: No), the value of the offset 2 may be stored. Thereby, when the time reduction state counter is 0 (S503: Yes), not only the processing of S504 but also the processing corresponding to the processing of S502 can be omitted, so that the processing load can be reduced. .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the offset 2 stored in any one of the general-purpose registers is not erased by the processing of S502. It may be configured to delete the offset 2 value that has been set. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 caused by erroneously referencing the general-purpose register storing the value of the offset 2 in another process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the out-of-position setting process (S309) executed when the current lottery result is determined to be out of the special symbol in the big hit determination process (S208) will be described.

  In the out-of-office setting process, first, a table to be used for determining a variation pattern is specified (S501). Specifically, referring to the state of the time reduction state flag in the various setting value storage area 203e and the counter value of the fluctuation selection state counter, one of the plurality of tables specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is specified. I do. As described above, if the counter value of the fluctuation selection state counter is not 0, a table dedicated to the end of the jackpot is selected. On the other hand, if the counter value of the variation selection state counter is 0, the table corresponding to the state of the time reduction state flag is selected.

  After the process of S501 is completed, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 (S502), and the variation pattern counter CS1 is read based on the read value of the variation type counter CS1 and the table selected in the process of S501. The mode is selected (S503). Then, a variation pattern command based on the mode of the selected variation pattern is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S504), and the process ends. The fluctuation pattern command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first entrance 64, and when there is a start win. This is a process for executing a hold process of the values indicated by the various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S601). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is retained in the special symbol N) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  If there is no winning in the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning in the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c must be less than 4. If this is the case (S603: No), this process ends and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S605).

  The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as a voice in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S605, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are updated. Then, the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first one of the empty reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) (S606). In the process of S606, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S606, the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol (whether or not a big hit), the type of stop (the big hit type in the case of a big hit), and its fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S607). Here, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined by one of the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the processing of S606 and the random number value (winning value) stored in the first random number table 202a. It is determined by comparing one. As described above, the random number value which is a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a high probability is stored in the first random number table 202a1 for the high probability, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52". , 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 " There are thirty random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and are "7, 107, 282" stored in the first random number table 202a2 for the low probability. .

  Whether the current state is the special symbol low-probability state or the special symbol high-probability state is determined by referring to the probability change state flag stored in the various setting value storage area 203e. Specifically, if the probable change state flag is on, the special symbol has a high probability state, and if the probable change state flag is off, the special symbol has a low probability state. In the process of S607, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a according to the state of the probability change state flag, and if these values match, the special It is determined that the symbol is a big hit.

  Then, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S606 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, It is determined which of the 13 types of special symbol jackpots (normal jackpot, time-saving jackpot A, time-saving jackpot B, special jackpot A, special jackpot B, probable jackpot A to probable jackpot H). As described above, the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is specified with reference to the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 6B).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is out of the range, based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S606, the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the front and rear out reach. , Or reach other than the front and rear departure, or complete departure. Here, if the probability change state flag is ON, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the processing of S606 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability, Determine the type of stop. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, it is determined that the vehicle is completely out of range. If it is "98, 99", it is determined that the reach is out of order. On the other hand, if the probability change flag 203e is off, the stop type is determined by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, it is determined that the vehicle is completely out of range. If it is "98, 99", it is determined that the reach is out of order.

  Next, a variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The fluctuation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is calculated from a fluctuation pattern selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 and a predicted lottery result and a predicted stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit). Is selected according to In the variation pattern table, for example, “variation (for long time)”, “variation (for short time)”, “variation of normal reach”, “variation of super reach”, “variation of special reach” "Variable patterns for jackpots" are stipulated, and "Various normal reach", "Various super reach", and "Various special reach" are stipulated. , "Common Super Reach", and "Common Special Reach". Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected in accordance with the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

  If the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (the big hit type in the case of a big hit), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S607, then the predicted success or failure of the lottery, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S608), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 13).

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S701). As for the hit during the normal symbol (second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is performed. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S701: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (S704). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 0 (S704: S704). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S708). Specifically, if the value of the time saving state counter stored in the various setting value storage area 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the probable change state flag is ON, it is determined that the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is present. .

  In the processing of S708, when it is determined that the normal symbol is reduced in time (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S709). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be hard to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (ie, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent a ball that is going to win the specific winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64, the first entrance 64 can be prevented from entering the ball during the special jackpot. Many balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the processing of S709, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, so it is acquired in the processing of S707. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 6C).

  In the process of S708, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol) (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S707 is Based on the random number table per common symbol for probabilities, a lottery result is determined as to whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 6C).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S710 or S711 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S712). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “○” is lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S714). If it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S714: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is the special symbol jackpot. Is determined (S715). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off In addition, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the processing of S715, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64 is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two (S716), and the process proceeds to S719. In the process of S714, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol) (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the open period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S712, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary design (S712: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S719). If it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S719: Yes), the variable display of the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, it is the normal state of the ordinary symbol) (S719: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( S721), and terminates this processing. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the release period of the first entrance 64 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). In addition, the fluctuation time here is a time set beforehand by the processing of S720 or the processing of S721 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S722, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S713, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighting). Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the end, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S713 or S718.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S724). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is set (S725), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started by the processing of S725, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next. Is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 13), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the second entrance 67, and when a ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the second hit random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is acquired (S802). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S803: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S805), and the process ends. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S901). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not, it is not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off is not completed normally, the process also shifts to S1012 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S912 in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1114 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S1013, S1014).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1013, S1014) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal, S1007: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1010, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1101). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 13). Send a prize ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the reserved ball number set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 14) and the start winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. The winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103). A jackpot control process for opening or closing a specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). Here, the jackpot state of the special symbol, specifically, it is determined that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern effect to become a jackpot, after the start of the jackpot is set, the end of the set jackpot Indicates the period until setting. In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20). The opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S405 of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 16) or the process of S504 of the out-of-position setting process (see FIG. 17), the variation pattern is set. Is started in the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set by the process of S405 of the big hit setting process (see FIG. 16) or the process of S504 of the out-of-position setting process (see FIG. 17). Is completed, the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the process of S404 of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 16) or the step S503 of the loss setting process (see FIG. 17) is completed. The stop symbol (the first symbol) is stopped (lighted) on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of (1).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S723 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the process is executed in the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S713 or the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1109). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1109: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1102 (S1111).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1108, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 22 has been executed, the processing at S1112 and thereafter when the power is turned off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to game state changes performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. It can be started from the processing of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S1001). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1101. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). The jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 24). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or specific prize winning is performed. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol is being hit (S1201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of S1201, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1201: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is during the special symbol big hit (1201: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1202). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1202: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1203), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1204). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio lamp in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1201, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1201: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or 0.5 seconds) elapses after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or when the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened. When a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) are won after the ball is opened, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1205, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1206), and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1205: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to end the big hit (S1207).

  In the process of S1207, if it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (S1207: Yes), the set value corresponding to the game state after the end of the jackpot is set and the set value for the jackpot is reset. Is executed (S1208), the game state after the end of the jackpot is set, and this process ends. Although details will be described later, in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 26), the jackpot flag is initialized ("00H" is set) together with other set values during the jackpot. Therefore, even when the power of the gaming machine is suddenly turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, it is possible to suppress that only the big hit flag is turned off and the other set values are kept at the setting of the big hit.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the final round of the jackpot, an ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the jackpot is set after the closing condition of the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a is satisfied. You. In the process of S1205, when it is determined that the set ending effect end timing (the effect time set for executing the ending effect has elapsed), it is determined that the big hit end timing has been reached.

  Note that the jackpot end timing is not necessarily limited to the end timing of the ending effect. For example, in the last round of the jackpot, when the closing condition of the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a is satisfied, it may be configured that it is the jackpot ending timing and the process may shift to the jackpot ending processing (S1208). .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28, the jackpot end process (S1208) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 25) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. As described above, the jackpot ending process (S1208) is a process for setting the set value corresponding to the gaming state after the end of the jackpot and resetting the set value for the jackpot.

  In the big hit end processing (S1208), first, the state setting table 202f is read from the ROM 202 (S1301). Here, “read” means that the upper byte (1AH) and the lower byte (D4H) of the head address (1AD4H) of the state setting table 202f are used as address data as a pair of general-purpose registers (for example, general-purpose registers). 210b1 and the general-purpose register 210b2).

  Next, in the game result set value acquisition processing (see FIG. 17) executed before the current big hit is started, the game result set value is previously stored in the offset value storage area of the various set value storage area 203e (see FIG. 11). The offset value is stored in the accumulator 210a. Since the upper byte (F0H) of the address of the various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 11) is a value stored as fixed value data in the address holding register 210f, the offset value is read using a 1-byte read instruction. be able to. That is, the lower byte (95H) of the address of the offset value storage area is specified as a read source (transfer source) and the accumulator 210a is specified as a setting destination. The stored offset value is read and transferred to the accumulator 210a that is the setting destination.

  By using the one-byte read instruction, the upper byte (F0H) of the address of the offset value storage area does not need to be described in the control program, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Next, a calculation process of multiplying the offset value stored in the accumulator 210a by 4 is performed (S1303). This value of 4 is the number of data types defined in the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8) as the setting value after the end of the big hit. That is, four kinds of set values of the special symbol lottery state, the ordinary symbol state, the number of times saved, and the number of times of switching the variation pattern selection mode are defined in the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8).

  As shown in parentheses in FIG. 8, the state setting table 202f includes, from the side with the smallest address value, the lottery state of the special symbol corresponding to the offset value 00H, the state of the ordinary symbol, the number of times saved, and the number of times of switching the variation pattern selection mode. , A special symbol lottery state corresponding to the offset 01H, a normal symbol state, the number of times saved, the number of times of changing the variation pattern selection mode,..., A special symbol lottery state corresponding to the offset 07H, a normal symbol state, the number of times reduced, The data is stored in the order of the variation pattern selection mode switching number. That is, each time the address value is increased by four, the set value corresponding to the offset value which is increased by one is stored. Therefore, the value obtained by multiplying the offset value by 4 is the difference (offset) between the start address of the state setting table 202f and the storage address of the data corresponding to the current offset value. In the process of S1303, an address difference (offset) with respect to the head address of the state setting table 202f is obtained.

  When the processing of S1303 is completed, the difference between the address value set in the pair of general-purpose registers (for example, the general-purpose register 210b1 and the general-purpose register 210b2) in the processing of S1301 with respect to the start address of the state setting table 202f calculated in the processing of S1302. (Offset) is added, and the address after the addition is set as the address of the data transfer source (read source) (S1304).

  Next, an address of the various setting value storage area 203e where the probable change state flag is stored is set as a setting destination address (S1305). Is transferred (S1306).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not all the four types of data specified in the state setting table 202f have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1307). If it is determined that the address exists (S1307: No), 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address, the data specified in the address after the addition is read (S1308), and 1 is added to the set destination address. The data read in the process of S1308 is stored in the address after the addition (S1309). Then, the process returns to S1307, and it is determined again whether all four types of data specified in the state setting table 202f have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1307). That is, the processing of S1307 to S1309 is repeatedly performed until all four types of data specified in the state setting table 202f are transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1307, when it is determined that all the four types of data specified in the state setting table 202f have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1307: Yes), the setting is made in the various setting value storage areas 203e. A state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the performed state is set (S1310), processing for clearing the set value of the jackpot is executed (S1311-S1312), and this processing ends.

  In the process of clearing the jackpot setting value, the start address of the jackpot end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) of the ROM 202 is set as the data transfer source (read source) address (S1311), A data setting process for resetting the data set to perform the control of (1) is executed (S1312), and 0 is set to the address where the setting value of the big hit is set in the various setting value storage area 203e. A zero setting process for initialization is executed (S1313).

  Next, the data setting process (S1312) performed in the big hit end process (see FIG. 26) will be described with reference to FIG. This data setting process (S1312) is a process for resetting the data set for performing the control during the big hit.

  In this data setting process (S1312), first, address data specified in a transfer source (read source) address is read, and an address indicated by the address data is set as a setting destination address (S1401). Here, the transfer source (reading source) address is set to the top address of the big hit end time setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) in the process of S1311 of the big hit end process (see FIG. 26). Further, as shown in FIG. 9A, the start address of the jackpot end setting table 202g stores address data indicating the gaming state setting area in the various setting value storage areas 203e. An address indicating the setting area is set as a setting destination address.

  Next, in the processing of S1401, it is determined whether or not the data read from the jackpot end setting table 202g is “00H” (S1402). If the determination result is “00H” (S1402: Yes), this processing is performed. And the process proceeds to the zero setting process (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the data read from the jackpot end setting table 202g is data other than “00H” (S1402: No), 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address, and The address after the addition is set as a new transfer source (read source) address (S1403).

  Next, the data of the set value stored in the transfer source address is read and stored in the set destination address (S1404). This setting destination address is the address of the various setting value storage area 202e set in the processing of S1401. When the data storage is completed, 1 is added to the transfer source address again, the new transfer source address is set (S1405), and the process returns to S1401. Then, in the process of S1402, the processes of S1401 to S1405 are repeated until 00H is read as the address data. Since it indicates that the reset process has been completed, the process ends.

  Subsequently, the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 after the data setting process (S1312) ends will be described with reference to FIG. The zero setting process (see FIG. 28) is a process of initializing the various setting value storage area 203e by overwriting the various setting values set for performing the big hit control with 0.

  In the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), first, 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address to set a new transfer source (read source) address (S1501). Note that the address set as the transfer source (reading source) address before executing the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) is the end address of the jackpot end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A). The big hit end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B) used in this process is defined in the ROM 202 after the address following the last address of the big hit end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A). ing. Therefore, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), 1 is added to the setting destination address at the beginning of the process, and the setting destination address is changed from the end of the big hit end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) to the big hit. The process is shifted to the beginning of the end-time clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot used in the present process (zero setting process) follows the end address of the jackpot end setting table 202g referred to in the data setting process (see FIG. 27). An end-time clear table 202h is defined. For this reason, by adopting a configuration in which this processing (zero setting processing) is executed following the data setting processing (see FIG. 27), in this processing, the transfer source address is determined again from the ROM 202 at the start of the processing and set. The transfer source address can be specified simply by adding 1 to the immediately preceding transfer source address without the need to perform the transfer again. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

  For example, at the end of the jackpot, if the data to be set in each address of the various setting value storage area 203e is all "00H", the data setting process (see FIG. 27) is omitted and the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) ) May be executed. In this case, at the start of the zero setting process, it is necessary to determine the transfer source address of the data, set the address immediately before the transfer source address as the transfer source address, and then shift to the process of S1501. In the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the process of S1501, a process of adding 1 to the transfer source address and setting it as a new transfer source address is executed. This is because an address shifted by one from the set address is set as the transfer source address.

  Next, in the big hit end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B), the address data stored in the address set as the transfer source (read source) address is read, and is indicated by the read address data. The address of the RAM 203 is set as a setting destination address (S1502).

  After the process of S1502, in the process of S1502, it is determined whether or not the data read from the transfer source (read source) address is “00H” (S1503), and the read data is determined to be “00H”. If the processing has been performed (S1503: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read data is not “00H” (S1503: No), “00H” is overwritten on the address of the RAM 203 set as the setting destination address (S1504), and the process returns to S1501.

  Thereafter, the processing of S1501 to S1504 is repeated until “00H” is read from the big hit end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B). In the big hit end clearing table 202h (see FIG. 9B), "00H" is stored only in the last address, and "00H" is not stored in the addresses other than the last. Until “00H” is stored in all the addresses corresponding to the address data defined in the above, the processing of S1501 to S1504 is repeated.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), the number of times of setting “00H” as data in the various setting value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203 is described in the control program. Instead of terminating the process when it is determined that the data setting for the set number of times has been completed, “00H” is read out as data from the big hit end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B). It is configured to terminate the process when it is determined that it has occurred.

  If the number of set values is described in the control program, the control program designer newly counts the number of set values each time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as diversion of the program to another model. It becomes necessary to rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, it takes time and effort to count the set values, and if the designer makes a mistake, the incorrect number of repetitions is specified in the control program, so that the setting at the end of the jackpot is completed normally. And the pachinko machine 10 may malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is only necessary to define “00H” as data at the end of the big hit end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B). Sometimes the possibility that the designer makes a mistake can be reduced. Therefore, the setting of the data at the end of the big hit can be executed more reliably based on the control program, and the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  Note that the end condition of the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) is that “00H” is read as data because the lower byte of the address in the various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 11) is used. Is an area where the setting value relating to the firing of the ball is stored, and an address whose setting value is not changed before and after the end of the jackpot (initialization is required at the end of the jackpot) And not the address). Since the address does not need to be initialized at the end of the jackpot, it is not necessary to define it as an initialization target address in the jackpot end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B), and the jackpot end clear table 202h ( There is no risk of appearing other than at the end of FIG. 9 (b). Therefore, it is possible to suppress that “00H” is read as the data before the initialization of all the setting values is completed, and the processing is ended.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 29, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1601). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, a so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1716 (see FIG. 30). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S1602). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1713 in FIG. 30), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1716. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1716 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1602: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure and the power-off processing in S1716. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1603).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1606. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to S1604, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process proceeds to S1608.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1604. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1716 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the process proceeds to S1608.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1602: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1716, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1604 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1604, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1604). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1606). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1607), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S1608, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1608). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S1716 (see S1715 in FIG. 30). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1716 is performed, the process of S1608 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1716 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1609), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1611), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason that the process of step S1608 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of steps S1604 to S1606 is followed by the process of step S1608. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), the process skips S1609, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1610, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1610), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1611), and shifts to the main processing.

  It should be noted that the reason why the clearing process of S1609 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S1604 to the process of S1608 via the process of S1606, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1604. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset and the start-up process is started, the control of the sound lamp control device 113 is continued by storing the data in the work area of the RAM 223 without clearing the data. Because you can.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S1701 was executed (S1701). If not (S1701: No), the process proceeds to S1711 without performing the processes of S1702 to S1710. In the processing of S1701, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processing in S1702 to S1710 is mainly for display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1711 and the variable display setting process in S1712 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1711 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1712 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1701 (S1701: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1703 to S1712 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1702). ). Next, the output mode of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1708 described later (S1703), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1704). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1705 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1705, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1706). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1707). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, and the frame button 22 is pressed during the reach effect to display the expectation of the jackpot. The effect may be changed to an effect that can be held, or the frame button 22 may be a determination button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1707 is omitted.

  Upon completion of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing, a lamp editing processing is executed (S1708), and then a sound editing / output processing is executed (S1709). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing in S1709, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1710), and the flow shifts to the processing in S1711. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1708 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1709 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1711, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1711). Details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1711). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the variable display setting process (S1712) ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1713). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1713 (S1713: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1715), and the power-off processing is executed (S1716). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S1717). In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1714), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1714: No), the process returns to S1701, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1714: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1711). This command determination process (S1711) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . In addition, in this process, when receiving the number-of-retained-balls command from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous announcement effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S1801). When the variation pattern command is received (S1801: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1802), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1803). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 32) is executed. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1801: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1804). When the stop type command is received (S1804: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1805), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1806). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1804: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1807). Then, when the reserved ball count command is received (S1807: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball count command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol) Is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1808). In the processing of S1808, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the end of the process in S1808, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 or when a special symbol is drawn. Every time is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S1808 to the special symbol retaining ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the detection of the start winning or the special At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1808 is executed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, the display control device 114 displays the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls on the third symbol display device 81.

In the processing of S1807, when the command of the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1807: No), it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1809). When the winning information command is received (S1809: Yes), various information (acceptance, stop type, change pattern) is extracted from the received winning information command as winning information (S1809). After the processing of S1809 is completed, the winning information (whether or not, the type of stop, the variation pattern) extracted in the processing of S1809 is then stored in the first of the free areas (first to fourth areas) of the winning information storage area 223a. Stored in the area (S1810),
Return to main processing.

  If the winning information command has not been received in the process of S1809 (S1809: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1812). When the round number command is received (S1812: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S1813), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number (S1813). S1814), this process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1812, if the round number command has not been received (S1812: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed ( S1819), and returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, a processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1712). This variable display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to execute a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1901). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1906. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1902), and then, in the process of S1803 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905). In the process of S1905, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the process of S1906.

  In the processing of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1906: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1907), and then, in the process of S1806 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31), The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1908).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1909), and the display control device is set based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notifying the display control unit 114 is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1910), and the process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 determines that the "special symbol jackpot", the fluctuating effect corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" and after the fluctuating effect The set value of the jackpot state (special game state) is set in various set value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203, and the offset value for selecting the state after the end of the jackpot from the state setting table 202f is stored in the RAM 203. It is configured. When the jackpot ends, the set value corresponding to the state after the jackpot is read out from the state setting table 202f based on the offset value stored in the RAM 203 in advance, and set in the various set value storage areas 203e. It is configured to be.

  The gaming state after the jackpot is determined based on a random number value acquired when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning). However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming state is acquired. The obtained random number value is held until the end timing of the jackpot, instead of being used to specify the gaming state after the jackpot, the obtained random number value is converted and held in the form of an offset value and held. The game state after the end of the jackpot is set based on the offset value.

  Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a random number value which becomes a jackpot of a special symbol to be obtained illegally from the outside, so that the timing at which the random number value which becomes a jackpot appears is analyzed, and a fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing is performed. Can be suppressed. Specifically, by setting the analyzed timing on a so-called hanging substrate, acquiring a random number at a timing when a random number value to be a big hit appears, and suppressing a fraudulent act of performing control so as to judge the success or failure of the big hit. Can be.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values to be set in the various setting value storage area 203e as a game state after the end of the big hit (a lottery state of a special symbol, a state of a normal symbol, a number of working hours, a variation pattern selection table). The number of times of switching is not specified and held before the start of the jackpot game, but only an offset value indicating a storage position of various setting values in the state setting table 202f is held. Therefore, it is sufficient that the RAM 203 only has a storage area for one byte of the offset value storage area. Therefore, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a zero setting process (see FIG. 28), which is a process for initializing the set value for the big hit at the end timing of the big hit, is executed. In this zero setting process (see FIG. 28), “00H” is sequentially set as data at a plurality of addresses specified in the big hit end clear table 202h of the ROM 202. That is, only the setting destination address for initializing the setting is defined in the big hit end clear table 202h, and the control of writing “00H” is described on the control program side.

  When the big hit end clear table 202h is configured to define the setting destination addresses of the various setting value storage areas 203e and the setting data (ie, 00H) for setting the setting destination addresses, the big hit end clear table There is a problem that the data amount of 202h increases. On the other hand, if only the setting destination address is defined in the big hit end clear table 202h as in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the data amount of the big hit end clear table 202h can be reduced. The capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), the number of times of setting data in the various setting value storage areas 203e is described in the control program, and the number of times of setting is described. Instead of terminating the process when it is determined that the data setting has been completed, the process is terminated when it is determined that "00H" has been read out as data from the big hit end clear table 202h. are doing.

  If the number of set values is described in the control program, the control program designer newly counts the number of set values each time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as diversion of the program to another model. It becomes necessary to rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, it takes time and effort to count the set values, and if the designer makes a mistake, the incorrect number of repetitions is specified in the control program, so that the setting at the end of the jackpot is completed normally. And the pachinko machine 10 may malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is only necessary to define “00H” as data at the end of the jackpot end setting table 202g and the jackpot end clearing table 202h, so that when designing the control program, The possibility that a designer makes a mistake can be reduced. Therefore, the setting of the data at the end of the big hit can be executed more reliably based on the control program, and the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the data setting process (see FIG. 27) and the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), the big hit end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) and the big hit end clear table 202h. Although the respective processes are terminated when “00H” is read as data from (see FIG. 9B), the termination condition of each process is not limited to this. For example, when “FFH” is read as data from the jackpot end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) or the jackpot end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B), each process ends. You may.

  Further, the conditions for terminating the data setting process (see FIG. 27) and the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) may be different. For example, when "00H" is read as data from the big hit end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A), the data setting process (see FIG. 27) ends, and the big hit end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9). The configuration may be such that the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) is terminated when “FFH” is read as data from (b).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a process of continuing the control specified in the ROM 202 until “00H” is read is provided only in the jackpot ending process (FIG. 26). It is not limited. For example, the same processing may be performed when setting at the start of fluctuation or when setting at the end of fluctuation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the big hit setting process (see FIG. 16), in addition to the setting of the fluctuation pattern, the setting of the big hit, the offset value, and the like are read from the game result setting table 202e. Although the process of transferring the data to the various setting value storage area 203e is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the big hit setting process (see FIG. 16), only the setting of the variation pattern may be performed, and a setting value or an offset value indicating the setting of the big hit may be set at the start of the big hit.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, two processes of a data setting process (see FIG. 27) and a zero setting process (see FIG. 28) are provided as processes for resetting the jackpot setting. The set value of a predetermined address in the set value storage area 203e is reset.

  More specifically, the data setting process (see FIG. 27) performed in the big hit end process (see FIG. 26) causes the big hit end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9 (a)) defined in the ROM 202 to be stored. Based on this, the setting of the game state is reset, and further, the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) executed following the data setting process (see FIG. 27) performs the big hit end clear table 202h ( Based on FIG. 9B), the set value of the address in the RAM 203 where the setting of the jackpot is set is cleared.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a jackpot end setting / clear table 202i including the information defined in the jackpot end setting table 202g and the information defined in the jackpot end clear table 202h is provided. Based on the information defined in the big hit end setting / clear table 202i, the big hit setting is reset by the data setting process (see FIG. 27).

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that the jackpot end setting table 202g provided in the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and A big hit end setting / clear table 202i is provided instead of the big hit end clear table 202h. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment stores a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, a game result setting A table 202e and a state setting table 202f are provided. The ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is provided with a jackpot end setting / clear table 202i in addition to the above. That is, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment is provided with a jackpot end setting / clear table 202i instead of the jackpot end setting table 202g and the jackpot end clear table 202h provided in the first embodiment. . The other configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The big hit end setting / clear table 202i is a table which is referred to for resetting the set value of the address where the big hit setting in the various set value storage areas 203e is set at the big hit end timing. The address is defined in the range of “1202H” to “121EH”. Details of the big hit end setting / clear table 202i will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 33 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of data specified in the big hit end setting / clear table 202i. As shown in FIG. 33 (b), the big hit end setting / clearing table 202i includes, in the various setting value storage areas 203e, address data indicating an address (setting destination) where the setting value needs to be reset, The setting contents to be set at the address (setting destination) are alternately defined. As the addresses that need to be reset, for example, an address (F030H) in which the setting of the maximum number of rounds is stored, an address of the winning number counter (F031H), and the like are defined.

  As described above, the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i includes data specified in the jackpot end setting table 202g and data specified in the jackpot end clear table 202h in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. And both are stipulated. Here, only the information indicating the address of the setting destination is defined in the big hit end clear table 202h, and the data “00H” stored in the address of the setting destination is not specified in the table, and the control program side The control process for setting “00H” is described. On the other hand, the big hit end setting / clear table 202i has a configuration in which the setting values to be set in all the setting destination addresses are defined in the table. That is, all data have the same data configuration as the jackpot end setting table 202g in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, two types of tables having different data structures (a jackpot end setting table 202g in which both the setting destination address data and the data to be set in the setting destination) are defined, Since the setting change of the various setting value storage areas 203e has been performed with reference to the big hit end clear table 202h) in which only the previous address data is specified, the data setting processing (see FIG. 27) and the zero setting are performed, respectively. It is necessary to provide two types of control processing, ie, processing (see FIG. 28), and perform the processing separately. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, only one type of the big hit end setting / clear table 202i is provided, and the data arrangement is the same as that of the big hit end setting table 202g. Therefore, if only one type of the data setting process (see FIG. 27) is prepared as the control process, all the settings relating to the big hit can be reset at the end of the big hit.

<Regarding the control processing in the second embodiment>
Hereinafter, it will be described with reference to FIG. 27 again that in the second embodiment, if only the data setting process (see FIG. 27) is provided, all the settings relating to the jackpot can be reset. As described above, FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a data setting process that is a process for resetting the setting value related to the jackpot.

  In the data setting process (see FIG. 27), first, address data specified in the transfer source address is read, and an address indicated by the read address data is set as a setting destination address (S1401). Here, in the first embodiment, before the data setting process is started, the transfer source (reading source) address is set to the head address of the jackpot end setting table 202g (S1311 in FIG. 26). In the second embodiment, instead of this, the start address (1202H) of the big hit end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B) is set as the transfer source (read source) address. Therefore, in the processing of S1401 performed after the start of the data setting processing (see FIG. 27), the address of the gaming state setting area defined in the start address of the big hit end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33 (b)). (F035H) is set to the setting destination address.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the data read as the setting destination address is “00H” (S1402). If it is determined that the data is “00H” (S1402: Yes), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read data is not “00H” (S1402: No), 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address and set as a new transfer source (read source) address (S1403). ).

  In the processing of S1402, which is performed first after the start of the data setting processing (see FIG. 27), the address (F035H) of the game state setting area is read as the setting destination address, so that the read data is not “00H”. It is determined (S1402: No), and the address (1203H) obtained by adding 1 to the start address (1202H) of the big hit end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B) is set as the transfer source address (S1403). .

  Thereafter, the setting value data stored in the transfer source address is set as the set destination address (S1404), 1 is added to the transfer source address, and the new transfer source address is set (S1405), and the process returns to S1401. In the process of S1404 performed first after the start of the data setting process (see FIG. 27), since the address “1203H” is set as the transfer source address, the reset data stored in the transfer source address is read. Then, the address (F035H) of the game state setting area is set (S1404), 1 is added to the transfer source address "1203H", and the transfer source address is set to "1204H" (S1405). Return.

  Thereafter, the setting destination address specified in the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B) is replaced with the setting specified in the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B). The process of writing the contents is repeated. The setting destination address specified in the big hit end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B) sets the test signal setting addresses “F01DH” and “F01EH” and the maximum number of rounds. Since addresses other than "00H", such as "F030H", are specified, it is determined that "00H" has been read out by the processing of S1402 before resetting all the setting destinations. The termination of the setting process (see FIG. 27) can be suppressed. When all the data is set, the transfer destination (reading source) address is set to “00H” defined at the end of the big hit end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B). The data setting process (see FIG. 27) is completed by the process of S1402.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a condition for terminating the data setting process (see FIG. 27), the number of times of setting data in the various setting value storage areas 203e is described in the control program, and Instead of terminating the process when it is determined that the data setting for the number of times has been completed, the process ends when it is determined that "00H" has been read out as data from the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i. It is configured to be.

  If the number of set values is described in the control program, the control program designer newly counts the number of set values each time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as diversion of the program to another model. It becomes necessary to rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, it takes time and effort to count the set values, and if the designer makes a mistake, the incorrect number of repetitions is specified in the control program, so that the setting at the end of the jackpot is completed normally. And the pachinko machine 10 may malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since it is only necessary to define “00H” as data at the end of the big hit end setting / clear table 202i, the control program The possibility that the designer makes a mistake at the time of designing can be reduced. Therefore, the setting of the data at the end of the big hit can be executed more reliably based on the control program, and the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, only one type of the big hit end setting / clear table 202i is provided, and the big hit setting is reset by referring to the single table. Therefore, if only one type of the data setting process (see FIG. 27) is prepared as the control process, all the settings relating to the jackpot can be reset at the end of the jackpot, so that the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment can be reset. Thus, the program capacity can be reduced as compared with the above.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the data setting process (see FIG. 27), when “00H” is read as data from the big hit end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33 (b)), Although the processing is configured to end, the end condition of the data setting processing (see FIG. 27) is not limited to this. For example, the process may be terminated when "FFH" is read as data from the setting / clearing table 202i at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 33B).

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) for initializing the set value for performing the control of the jackpot, the clearing table at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 9B) is used. In this configuration, “00H” is set to all the setting destination addresses. For this reason, if there is a set value having an initial value other than “00H”, it cannot be defined in the big hit end clear table (see FIG. 9B), and another process is provided to provide an initial value. Values had to be set separately.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, at the end of the jackpot, a plurality of set values having different initial values can be initialized by one process. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, among the set values initialized based on the big hit end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B), the initial values of the set values related to the test signal are initialized. The value is configured to be “FFH”. On the other hand, the set value of the maximum number of rounds and the initial value of the winning number counter and the like are configured to be "00H", similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is replaced with the big hit end clear table 202h provided in the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10. That is, a big hit end initial value setting table 202j is provided. Further, a partial process included in the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
First, an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment stores a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, a game result setting A table 202e, a state setting table 202f, and a jackpot end setting table 202g are provided. The ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is provided with a jackpot end time initial value setting table 202j in addition to the above. That is, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment is provided with a jackpot end time initial value setting table 202j instead of the big hit end clear table 202h provided in the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the jackpot end time initial value setting table 202j will be described with reference to FIG. The big hit end initial value setting table 202j is a table stored in the addresses “1205H” to “1212H” of the ROM 202, and the addresses of the various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 11) are defined in each address. Have been. Note that, in the jackpot ending initial value setting table 202j, data "00H" is stored in the addresses "1207H" and "1213H" of the ROM 202 as data. The “00H” data is not data for designating an address, but data for ending the repetitive processing for setting an initial value.

  Although details will be described later, in the zero setting process 2 (see FIG. 36), which is one of the jackpot end processes, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 arranges the addresses of the ROM 202 from the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j in the ROM 202. The stored data is read, and either “00H” or “FFH” (initial value data) is set as the set value in the address indicated by the read stored data (address data).

  Whether to set “00H” or “FFH” as the initial value is determined by the order of data. Specifically, the address of the various setting value storage area 203e indicated by the data stored at the address before the address "1207H" in which "00H" is defined as the data is set to "FFH" as the initial value. Set. On the other hand, "00H" is set as an initial value in the address of the various setting value storage area 203e indicated by data stored at an address subsequent to the address "1207H" in which "00H" is defined as data.

<Control Process in Third Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. First, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. In the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 35), similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a set value for determining a state after the jackpot is ended is set in the various set value storage areas 203e, and control relating to the jackpot is performed. This is a process executed to reset a set value set to be performed.

  In the big hit end processing (see FIG. 35), in each processing of S1301 to S1312, the same processing as each of the big hit end processing of S1301 to S1312 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 26) is executed. Then, in the big hit end processing (see FIG. 35) in the third embodiment, when the processing of S1312 is completed, the big hit end processing (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment is replaced with the zero setting processing (S1313), and is set to zero. Processing 2 (S1321) is executed. This zero setting process 2 (S1321) is a process for resetting the set values set in the various set value storage areas 203e to the initial values in order to control the big hit.

  Here, the details of the zero setting process 2 (S1321) will be described with reference to FIG. In the zero setting process 2 (S1321), in each of the processes of S1501 to S1503, the same processes as the respective processes of S1501 to S1503 of the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment are executed. The description is omitted.

  If it is determined in step S1502 that the address data read from the transfer source (read source) address is not “00H” (S1503: No), the various setting value storage areas designated as the setting destination addresses in step S1502 “FFH” is set as the initial value in the address of 203e (S1511), and the process returns to S1501. On the other hand, if it is determined that the address data read in the process of S1502 is “00H” (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1512. That is, the processing of S1501 to S1503 and S1511 is repeated until “00H” is read as data from the initial value setting table 202j at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 34B).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the initial value of the set value of the test signal is “FFH”. On the other hand, the initial value of the set value other than the set value of the test signal (the set value of the maximum number of rounds, the value of the winning number counter, and the like) is “00H”. In order to collectively set these different initial values, the address for setting the test signal is defined in order from the head address of the jackpot ending initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34B). Until the data "00H" is read from the jackpot ending initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34 (b)), the jackpot ending initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34 (b)) is read. The process of setting "FFH" as an initial value at the data setting position (address) is looped, and when "00H" is read, the loop is terminated and the process proceeds to S1512.

  Next, in the process of S1512, 1 is added to the address of the jackpot ending initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34B) set as the transfer source (reading source) (S1512), and the address after the addition is added. The address data stored in the RAM 203 is read out and set as a setting destination address for setting an initial value (S1513).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the address data read in the process of S1513 is “00H” (S1514). If it is determined that the read data is “00H”, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read data is not “00H” (S1514: No), “00H” is set to the address set as the setting destination (S1515), and the process returns to S1512 again. That is, as long as “00H” is not read as data from the jackpot ending initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34B), the jackpot ending initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34B). "00H" is set as an initial value in order in the address where the data is stored. When “00H” is read as data from the initial value setting table 202j at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 34B), it means that initial values have been set for all setting destinations. The process ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as setting items to be initialized at the end of the big hit, in addition to the setting value having the initial value “00H”, the setting value having the initial value “FFH” Is also configured so that initialization can be performed in one process. Therefore, the degree of freedom in setting the initial value of each set value can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the initial value is set to “00H” and the initial value is set to “FFH”. However, the initial value of each setting item is not limited to these values. , "0FH" may be set as an initial value, and "01H" may be set as an initial value.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the zero setting process 2 (see FIG. 36), when “00H” is read as data from the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34 (b)), It is configured to exit the loop processing of sequentially setting “FFH” as an initial value to each setting destination address specified in the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34B). Conditions for exiting the process are not limited to this. The data that can be used as a condition for exiting the loop processing may be any data that corresponds to the lower byte of the address where the setting is not likely to be changed when the gaming state is changed. For example, in the various setting value storage areas 203e, the addresses “F09CH” to “F0FFH” are unused work areas as described above. Therefore, since the set value is not rewritten due to a change in the game state or the like, the lower byte (for example, “AAH” or “BBH”) of any of these addresses may be used as the termination condition.

  Similarly, the data setting process in the first and second embodiments (see FIG. 27), the zero setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 28), and the zero setting process 2 in the third embodiment The condition for ending (see FIG. 36) is not limited to the case where “00H” is read as data. For example, the process is ended when “AAH” or “BBH” is read. May be configured.

  Further, the initial values set in the zero setting process 2 (see FIG. 36) in the third embodiment are not limited to two types, and an arbitrary number of initial values may be provided.

  In addition, the data setting process in the first and second embodiments (see FIG. 27), the zero setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 28), and the zero setting process 2 in the third embodiment (FIG. 36) Are executed to initialize the jackpot setting when the jackpot ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case where the number of times of saving time of the ordinary symbol becomes 0 and the state shifts to the normal state of the ordinary symbol, any of these processes may be used to delete the setting of the time saving state of the ordinary symbol.

  Further, the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the data setting process (see FIG. 27), the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) in the second embodiment, and the zero setting process in the third embodiment 2 (see FIG. 36) is configured such that reading of one data and setting of one data are alternately performed. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of data are collectively read and the collectively read data is set collectively.

  For example, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) of the first embodiment, the address data stored in the transfer source address is read and set as the set destination address (see S1502 in FIG. 28). If the data is other than “00H” (S1503: No), the process may return to S1501 without going to S1504.

  Specifically, each time a transfer source address is newly set by the processing of S1501, the address data stored in the transfer source address is stored in different general-purpose registers (general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2). By doing so, it is set to the setting destination address. For example, first, the data stored at the address set as the transfer source address by the process of S1501 is stored in the general-purpose register 210b1, and then stored at the address newly set as the transfer source address by the process of S1501 performed next. The stored data may be stored in, for example, the general-purpose register 210b2. Thereafter, each time the transfer source address is updated by the process of S1501, the transfer source address may be sequentially stored in the general-purpose register 210c1, the general-purpose register 210c2, or the like.

  If it is determined in step S1503 that the read address data is “00H”, the process ends after overwriting “00H” as data on all addresses set as the setting destination addresses. It may be configured as follows.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, six types of general-purpose registers 210b1, 210b2, 210c1, 210c2, 210d1, and 210d2 are provided as general-purpose registers for temporarily storing data. Can be set at a maximum of six types, but the number of general-purpose registers may be increased so that more setting destination addresses can be set.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments, the setting of the fluctuation pattern, the setting during the big hit, and the setting when the big hit is ended when the big hit is won are performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Was not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the pachinko machines 10 of the first to third embodiments, the game result setting table 202e, the state setting table 202f, and the like are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments, the various setting value storage areas 203e are provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, and a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and is not provided with a handle for launching a ball. Things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be described.

<Feature A group> (The process ends when 00H is read)
Control means for executing a game control according to a predetermined control procedure; storage means for storing control data read by the control means; and control data read by the control means for specifying predetermined data. Control data discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the control data is read out. The control means repeats reading of the control data and control based on the read control data in accordance with the control procedure. When executing the process, the read control process is terminated based on the fact that the read control data is determined to be the specific data by the control data determining unit, and the next process executed according to the control procedure is performed. Gaming machine A1 characterized by shifting to the processing of (1).

  According to the gaming machine A1, the control of the game is executed by the control means in accordance with a predetermined control procedure, the control data read by the control means based on the control procedure is stored in the storage means, and the read control data is stored in the storage means. It is determined by the control data determining means whether or not the data is predetermined specific data. When the control unit executes a read control process of repeatedly reading control data and performing control based on the read control data, it is determined that the read control data is predetermined specific data. Based on the determination by the means, the read control process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process executed according to the control procedure.

  Accordingly, in the read control process, if the specific data is read, the process proceeds to the next process, so that it is not necessary to define how many times the control data read and the control based on the read control data are repeated. . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the control from being performed a different number of times from the number of repetitions to be performed by the readout control process due to a mistake in defining the number of repetitions. Therefore, there is an effect that a malfunction of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1, in the control data, setting data indicating a setting destination for performing a setting related to a game and setting data for setting the setting destination indicated by the setting data are alternately defined. In the read control process, data is read in the order specified in the control data, and the next setting data to be read is set to the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data. A gaming machine A2 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, setting data indicating a setting destination for performing settings related to the game and setting data for setting the setting destination indicated by the setting data are alternately defined in the control data. The data is read by the read control process in the order specified by the control data, and the next setting data to be read is set to the setting destination indicated by the read setting data.

  Accordingly, when reading data, it is not necessary to perform a process of determining which data should be read next among the data specified in the control data, so that the processing load on the control unit can be reduced. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine A2, there is provided state change determining means for determining whether or not to change the gaming state, and the control data is one in which various setting values relating to the gaming state are defined as the setting data. A gaming machine A3 for executing the read control process when the state change determining means determines that the gaming state is to be changed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2. That is, whether or not the game state is changed is determined by the state change determination unit. Various setting values relating to the gaming state are defined in the control data as setting data. When it is determined by the state change determining means that the game state is to be changed, the reading control processing is executed by the control means.

  Thereby, when the game state is changed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a malfunction of the gaming machine without setting the set value to be set.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A3, the specific data is different from any other data specified in the control data.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A1 to A3. That is, since the specific data is different from any other data specified in the control data, the same data as the specific data is not read before the specific data is read from the control data.

  Therefore, since the read control process is repeated until the specific data is read, it is possible to prevent the read control process from being terminated before all the controls to be performed by the read control process are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a malfunction of the gaming machine without executing the control to be executed.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A4, the specific data is defined at the end of the control data.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A4, since the specific data is specified at the end of the control data, control based on all other data specified in the control data is ensured. There is an effect that can be executed.

<Feature B group> (0 is sequentially set to the addresses stored in the table until 00H is read)
According to a predetermined control procedure, a control means for controlling the game, and a storage means for storing a plurality of setting destination data indicating a setting destination where the control means performs a setting related to the game, the control means according to the control procedure A reading process for sequentially reading the setting destination data from the storage means and a setting process for setting a predetermined setting value to a setting destination indicated by the setting destination data read by the reading process. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B1, according to a predetermined control procedure, a plurality of setting destination data indicating a setting destination at which the control means for controlling the game performs a setting relating to the game is stored by the storage means. A reading process for sequentially reading the setting destination data from the storage unit in accordance with the control procedure, and a setting process for setting a predetermined setting value to a setting destination indicated by the setting destination data read by the reading process, respectively, are performed by the control unit. It is repeated.

  Thus, a predetermined setting value can be set by the setting process without storing the setting value for setting the setting destination data read by the reading process in the gaming machine. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of data stored at a predetermined set value can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B1, the control unit performs the setting process based on the read one set destination data every time one set destination data is read by the read process. Gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B1, each time one set destination data is read out by the read process, the control means performs the setting process based on the one set destination data read. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of data read by the reading process and set by the setting process can be minimized.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the setting destination data is defined in the order in which the data is read by the control means.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1 or B2. That is, since the setting destination data is defined in the order in which the data is read by the control means, the processing of determining which data to be read next among the data stored in the storage means at each read processing is determined. There is no need to do. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load on the control means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B3, the control means determines whether or not the setting destination data read by the read processing is predetermined specific data, and the control means reads the setting data by the determination means. When the determined setting data is determined to be predetermined specific data, there is provided an avoiding means for avoiding a process of setting a predetermined setting value to a setting destination indicated by the read setting data. A gaming machine B4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines B1 to B3. That is, the determination means determines whether or not the setting destination data read by the reading process is predetermined specific data. When the determination unit determines that the read setting destination data is the predetermined specific data, the process of setting a predetermined setting value to the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data is avoided. Avoided by means.

  Thus, the read process and the setting process can be repeated until the specific data is read, even if the number of times the read process and the setting process are repeated is not specified in the control program. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the read control process from being terminated before all the controls to be performed by the read control process are executed due to a mistake in defining the number of repetitions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a malfunction of the gaming machine due to the fact that the control to be executed is not executed.

  In the gaming machine B4, the specific data is data different from any of the other setting destination data stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B4. That is, since the specific data is different from any of the other setting destination data stored in the storage unit, the same data as the specific data is not read before the specific data is read from the storage unit.

  Thus, the reading process and the setting process are repeated until the specific data is read, so that it is possible to prevent the process from being completed before all the controls to be performed by the control unit are executed. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a malfunction of the gaming machine without executing the control to be executed.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the specific data is defined at the end of the setting destination data.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4 or B5, since the specific data is defined at the end of the setting data, the control based on all other setting data stored in the storage means. Can be surely executed.

  In the gaming machine B4, the predetermined set value is provided with a first set value and a second set value different from the first set value, and the control means controls the control procedure by the determination means. Until it is initially determined that the setting data read in accordance with the above is the predetermined specific data, the setting data is read and the first setting value is set to the setting destination indicated by the read setting data. After the first determination that the setting data read out according to the control procedure by the determining means is predetermined specific data, the reading of the setting data and the reading thereof are performed. A game machine B7 that repeats the process of setting the second set value to the set destination indicated by the set destination data.

  According to the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B4. That is, the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value are provided as the predetermined set values. Until the setting data read by the determining means in accordance with the control means is first determined to be the predetermined specific data, the setting data is read and the first setting is made to the setting destination indicated by the read setting data. The process of setting the value is repeated by the control means. After it is initially determined that the setting destination data read according to the control procedure is the predetermined specific data, the setting destination data is read, and the second setting value is set to the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data. Is repeated by the control means.

  This eliminates the need to store the first set value and the second set value in association with the setting destination, and thus has the effect of reducing the amount of data stored in the storage unit.

<Feature C group> (Calculate the offset value from the jackpot random number and hold the offset value during the jackpot)
In a gaming machine having storage means for storing information relating to a game, and control means for performing control relating to the game, a game state determination means for determining a game state, and a game state determined by the game state determination means, Game state setting means for setting based on establishment of a condition, wherein the storage means includes setting data for setting a game state by the game state setting means, and data necessary for selecting the setting data. Selection means for storing, from the storage means, identification data corresponding to the game state determined by the game state determination means, and identification data selected by the selection means. Holding means for holding at least until the predetermined condition is satisfied, wherein the game state setting means is held by the holding means Gaming machine C1, characterized in that the setting data corresponding to the identification data are, and sets read from said storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the gaming state is determined by the gaming state determining means, and the setting data for setting the gaming state by the gaming state setting means and the identification data necessary for selecting the setting data are stored. Stored by means. Identification data corresponding to the game state determined by the game state determination means is selected from the storage means by the selection means, and the identification data selected by the selection means is held by the holding means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Setting data corresponding to the identification data held by the holding means is read out from the storage means and set by the gaming state setting means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition.

  Thereby, since the identification data corresponding to the game state determined by the game state determination unit is held by the holding unit, it is possible to prevent the method of determining the game state by the game state determination unit from being acquired from outside. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an improper act of externally controlling the game state determining means to determine a game state that is advantageous to the player.

  In the gaming machine C1, the identification data is smaller in size than the setting data.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the identification data is smaller in size than the setting data, so that the amount of data stored in the holding unit is smaller than when the setting data is held by the holding unit. There is an effect that it can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the storage means stores a plurality of state data for setting a game state from when the game state is determined by the game state determination means to when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Wherein the identification data is stored in the storage unit in association with each of the plurality of state data, and a state selection unit selects and sets one state data from the plurality of state data A gaming machine C3 comprising: means for selecting the identification data corresponding to the first state data selected by the state selecting means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1 or C2. That is, the storage means stores a plurality of state data for setting the game state from when the game state is determined by the game state determination means to when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Identification data is stored in the storage means in association with each of the plurality of state data. One state data is selected from the plurality of state data by the state selection means and set.

  Thus, when the identification data is selected by the selection means, it is only necessary to select the identification data stored in association with the one state data selected and set by the state selection means. There is an effect that the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where data and data are selected independently.

  When the gaming state is determined by the gaming state determining means, the gaming machine C1 includes state setting means for setting a gaming state different from the determined gaming state until the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, when the gaming state is determined by the gaming state determining means, a gaming state different from the determined gaming state is determined by the state setting means by the predetermined condition. Is established until the condition is satisfied, so that the player's interest in the game until the predetermined condition is satisfied can be improved.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C3, acquiring means for acquiring random information based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the random information And a lottery means for performing a lottery, wherein the gaming state determining means, when it is determined by the lottery means to shift to the special gaming state, the gaming state based on the random information acquired by the acquiring means Wherein the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means based on the end of the special gaming state. .

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines C1 to C3. That is, random information is obtained by the obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the random information is determined by the lottery means. Is determined. When it is determined by the lottery means to shift to the special game state, the game state is determined by the game state determination means based on the random information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the end of the special gaming state, the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means.

  As a result, it is not necessary to hold the random information obtained by the obtaining unit until the special game state ends, so that information corresponding to the special game state among the random information is obtained from the outside due to fraud. Can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an illegal act of inputting information corresponding to the special game state from the outside and shifting to the special game state.

<Characteristic D group> (Data readout is performed collectively, and then data is set collectively)
In accordance with a predetermined control procedure, control means for controlling the game, storage means for storing a plurality of setting destination data indicating a setting destination where the control means performs settings related to the game, and setting destination data stored in the storage means A data storage area to be stored, and a determination unit that determines whether the setting destination data read by the control unit is predetermined specific data, and the control unit, according to the control procedure, A read storage process for reading out the set destination data from the storage means and storing the read set destination data in the data storage area for a plurality of set destination data; And a batch setting process of batch setting a predetermined set value to each of the setting destinations indicated by the plurality of setting destination data stored in the In the reading and storing process, the process shifts to the batch setting process based on that the determination unit determines that the read setting destination data is predetermined specific data. Gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, according to a predetermined control procedure, a plurality of setting destination data indicating a setting destination at which the control means for controlling the game makes a setting relating to the game is stored by the storage means, and is stored in the storage means. The setting destination data is stored in the data storage area. The determination means determines whether the setting destination data read by the control means is predetermined specific data. In accordance with the control procedure, read-out processing is repeated from a plurality of setting-destination data to read the setting-destination data from the storage means and store the read setting-destination data in the data storage area; The control means executes a collective setting process of collectively setting a predetermined set value to each of the setting destinations indicated by the plurality of setting destination data stored in the area. In the read storage process, the process shifts to the batch setting process based on the determination that the read setting destination data is the predetermined specific data by the determination unit.

  As a result, when the specific data is read out in the readout storage process, the process shifts to the batch setting process. Therefore, in the readout storage process, it is specified how many times the reading of the setting destination data and the storage in the data storage area are repeated. No need. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control from being performed a different number of times from the number of repetitions to be performed by the reading and storing process due to a mistake in defining the number of repetitions. Therefore, there is an effect that a malfunction of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the specific data is different from any of the other setting destination data stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. That is, since the specific data is different from any other data specified in the control data, the same data as the specific data is not read before the specific data is read from the control data.

  Thus, the read storage process is repeated until the specific data is read, so that it is possible to prevent the read storage process from being terminated before all the controls to be performed by the read storage process are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a malfunction of the gaming machine without executing the control to be executed.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the specific data is stored at the end of the setting destination data.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, since the specific data is defined at the end of the setting destination data, control based on all other setting destination data stored in the storage means is performed. Can be executed reliably.

  The gaming machine Z1 wherein each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is inserted into a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. The requirement for winning (or passing through the winning opening) is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display unit is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  The gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
110 Main controller (control means)
202 ROM (storage means)
S1207 State change determination means S1312 Read control processing S1402 Control data determination means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the gaming state is changed , the state is changed by setting a set value to a plurality of setting destinations for performing settings relating to the gaming state. In such a gaming machine, in order to set a set value, a setting destination for setting the set value and a set value to be set for the set destination are previously defined in a storage means such as a ROM, and the state is changed. Are set according to the contents specified in the storage means .

JP-A-2002-000905

However, among the plurality of setting destinations of such a gaming machine , there are some setting destinations having common setting values. In this case, there is a possibility that the data amount of the storage means increases .

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the amount of data .

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 has a control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure, and a setting for performing a setting relating to the game as control data used for control by the control means. Storage means for storing at least a setting destination data group composed of a plurality of setting destination data indicating a destination , wherein the control means, in accordance with the control procedure, from the setting destination data group stored in the storage means, A read process for sequentially reading the setting data, and a setting for setting a predetermined common setting value to the setting destination indicated by the read setting data each time one set data is read by the reading process. The process is repeated .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a plurality of control means for controlling a game in accordance with a predetermined control procedure and a plurality of setting destinations for performing setting related to the game as control data used for control by the control means. Storage means for storing at least a setting destination data group composed of setting destination data, wherein the control means sequentially sets the setting destination data from the setting destination data group stored in the storage means according to the control procedure. The reading process to be read and the setting process of setting a predetermined common setting value to the setting destination indicated by the read setting data each time the one setting data is read by the reading process are repeatedly performed. Things .

Thereby, there is an effect that the amount of data stored in the storage unit can be reduced .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a first hit type counter C2 and a big hit type in a special symbol. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a second random number counter C4 and a hit in an ordinary symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the game result setting table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the state setting table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit end setting table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit end clear table. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of various setting value storage areas. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a register. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit determination processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the game result set value acquisition processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the setting process at the time of a miss which is performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a data setting process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the zero setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the big hit end setting / clear table in the second embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the initial value setting table at the end of the big hit in the third embodiment. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows zero setting processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 3rd embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have uniformity. In the present pachinko machine 10, three stages of “city stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage” are provided. There are two stages. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 described later are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “the empty stage” → "Island stage" → "City stage" → ... repeatedly. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and when the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first symbol) is selected when the ball passes through the second entrance 67. Lottery). In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance opening 64, the winning or non-judgment of the special symbol jackpot is performed, and if the special symbol jackpot is determined, the type of the jackpot is determined. Is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls are won). ) It is released and the release is repeated a plurality of times. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are 13 types of special symbol jackpot types: "hour jackpot A" to "hour jackpot C", and "probable jackpot A" to "probable jackpot J". The jackpot ends after the special game state ends. As a later added value, a game value (game value) corresponding to these jackpot types is given to the player. Although the details will be described later, for example, when the jackpot type is “probably variable jackpot A”, a game value of shifting to a high probability state of a special symbol is provided after the jackpot is completed. When the jackpot type is “hour saving jackpot B”, a game value is provided in which the normal symbol time saving state continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 30 times after the end of the jackpot.

  In addition, when a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the variation of the special symbol, and after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds), The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entrance port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed in the first symbol display. This is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Accordingly, during the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, it is determined whether the symbol is a hit or not. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. State. In other words, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the first entry opening 64, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is changed to the first symbol display device 37. And at the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, the special symbol jackpot types include “normal jackpot”, “hour jackpot A”, “hour jackpot B”, “extra jackpot A”, “extra jackpot B”, and “probable jackpot A” to “ There are 13 types of “probably variable jackpot H”.

  When the "normal jackpot" is reached, a special game state in which the number of rounds is 16 (16 rounds jackpot) is obtained, but no added value is given after the jackpot ends. That is, after the end of the big hit, the state shifts to the special symbol low probability state, and does not shift to the “normal symbol time reduction state” (normal symbol time reduction).

  In the case of “hour-saving jackpot A” and “hour-saving jackpot B”, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16 round jackpots). ”(Normally during the time reduction of symbols). However, the period during which the "normal time saving state" (normal time saving during normal time) is different between "time saving big hit A" and "time saving big hit B". Specifically, in the case of "hour-saving jackpot A", the probability of winning a regular symbol increases from the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery 20 times, regardless of the state when the jackpot is won. On the other hand, in the “time saving big hit B”, there is a difference in a period in which the “normal symbol time saving state” continues according to the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. Specifically, if the special symbol has a high probability of winning in the "Time Saving Big B", the winning probability of the ordinary symbol will increase from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times. In the case where the "time saving big hit B" is won during the low probability state of the symbol, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol increases from the end of the big hit to the end of the special symbol lottery 20 times. In the present embodiment, the period in which the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is continued is defined by the number of lotteries of the special symbol, but may be defined by the number of times the variation of the special symbol ends.

  In addition, when the "special jackpot A" or the "special jackpot B" is won, each of the number of rounds is set to a special game state of eight rounds (8 round jackpot), and thereafter, according to the state before winning the jackpot, The state shifts to a "special symbol high probability state" or a "special symbol low probability state" and a "normal symbol time reduction state". Specifically, if you win "Special Jackpot A" or "Special Jackpot B" during the time-saving of the regular symbol given after various time-saving jackpots, after the jackpot is over, it will transition to the "special symbol high probability state" I do. On the other hand, in the state other than during the time saving of the normal symbol given after the end of the various time saving jackpots (that is, during the high probability state of the special symbol, or during the low probability state of the special symbol, and during the normal state of the ordinary symbol) When the "special jackpot A" or the "special jackpot B" is won, the state shifts to the "normal symbol time reduction state". In addition, the period during which the "normal symbol time reduction state" continues after the end of the jackpot is until the special symbol lottery is completed 20 times in the "special jackpot A", and the special symbol in the "special jackpot B" Until the lottery is completed 30 times.

  Further, in the “probably variable jackpot A” to the “probably variable jackpot H”, all of them are in the special game state, and thereafter, the state is shifted to the “special symbol high probability state” as an added value after the end of the big hit. However, in the “probably variable jackpot A” to the “probably variable jackpot H”, the number of rounds of the jackpot and the operation pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are different from each other. Specifically, in the “probably variable jackpot A” to “probably variable jackpot D”, the number of rounds is a 16-round special game state (16 rounds jackpot), and in the “probably variable jackpot E” to “probably variable jackpot H”, the number of rounds is Two rounds of special game state (two rounds big hit).

  Further, in the “probably variable jackpot A” or the “probably variable jackpot F” to “probably variable jackpot H”, in each round during the special game state, the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is determined by another jackpot type. Is different from Specifically, in "hour jackpot A" to "hour jackpot C", "probable jackpot A", "probable jackpot B", "probable jackpot D" to "probable jackpot G", 30 seconds elapse in each round. , Or the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened until 10 balls are won. On the other hand, in the “probable variable jackpot C” and “probable variable jackpot H” to “probable variable jackpot J”, In the round, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened until 0.5 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since an upper limit is set for the number of firings of a game ball (for example, a maximum of 100 times per minute), a specific winning opening (large opening opening) is required within 0.5 seconds. It is extremely difficult to make 10 balls win in 65a), and in most cases, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed before 10 balls win. Therefore, in “probably variable jackpot C” and “probably variable jackpot H” to “probably variable jackpot J”, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player per round is smaller than that of other jackpot types.

  Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (during a special symbol being changed), in other words, the special game state (big hit). It is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, a case where the special symbol is not in the high probability state is called a special symbol low probability state, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the special symbol probability state, that is, the special symbol jackpot probability is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of the special symbol). The “normal symbol time reduction state” (medium symbol time reduction) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases and a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state", it is called "normal symbol normal state", which means that the normal symbol hit probability is normal state, that is, the hit probability is lower than during normal time. .

  After that, the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol from the end of the special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol lottery after one of the “hour jackpot A” and the “hour jackpot B” is finished. Until a predetermined number of times (20 times, 30 times) is completed, it is generally referred to as a symbol shortening period. In addition, in order to make the description easy to understand, the number of lotteries of the special symbol is used to indicate the time reduction period of the ordinary symbol. For example, if the predetermined number of times is 20, the time reduction period of the normal symbol is described as 20 times. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with various gaming states such as a big hit state, a normal symbol time saving state, a special symbol positive change state, and the like, and the player's interest is improved. I have.

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot according to the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot, the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening port) 65a in each round, and the state after the end of the jackpot, according to the type of the jackpot. (Whether the special symbol is in a probable state or the normal symbol is in a time saving state). On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common regardless of the type of jackpot, or the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening port) 65a in each round may be common regardless of the type of jackpot. Also, for example, instead of changing the period during which the “normal symbol time saving state” is set according to the type of the jackpot, a time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 or one time The number of times the electric accessory is opened at the time of the normal symbol may be changed. Further, the number of rounds and the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are not limited to the aspect of the present embodiment. For example, a 4-round jackpot or a 9-round jackpot may be provided. As the closing condition of the winning opening (large opening) 65a, for example, a condition "until 3 seconds elapse or until ten balls are won", or a condition "until 10 seconds elapse or five balls are won" A jackpot with the condition "until" may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot is finished, it is configured to shift to any one of the "high probability state of the special symbol" or the "time saving state of the ordinary symbol". Until the special symbol lottery is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) from the end, the special symbol high probability state is always configured, and after the predetermined number of special symbol lottery ends, The transition to the “low probability state of the special symbol” and the “normal time saving state of the ordinary symbol” or the “normal state of the ordinary symbol” may be adopted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type becomes “hour-saving jackpot A”, the normal symbol time-saving state continues after the “hour-saving jackpot A” ends and the special symbol lottery ends 20 times. ”, The time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is continued until the special symbol lottery ends 20 or 30 times after the“ hour-saving jackpot B ”ends, but the duration of the time-saving state may be arbitrarily determined. . For example, if the jackpot type becomes "hour jackpot A", after the "hour jackpot A" ends, until the special symbol lottery ends 60 times, the normal symbol time saving state is continued. The time saving state of the normal symbol may be continued until the special symbol lottery ends 120 times after the “hour saving big hit B” ends. Further, instead of the number of lotteries of the special symbol, the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot types ("hour saving jackpot A", "special jackpot A", and "special jackpot A") differing in the added value given to the player after the jackpot is completed according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won. A special jackpot B ") is provided, but the added value given to the player after the end of the jackpot may be fixed regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. For example, in the case of winning the "time-saving jackpot A", the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times after the jackpot, regardless of the state of the jackpot winning, If the special jackpot A or the special jackpot B is won, the state may be changed to the special symbol high probability state after the jackpot irrespective of the state at the time of the jackpot winning.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a variation by displaying a lighting state to indicate whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting winning) into the first ball entrance 64, is performed, or the variation is performed. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a change is not executed among the balls inserted into the first entrance 64. The number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being fluctuated on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entering the first entrance 64 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four times, but three times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). In the present embodiment, only one first ball entrance 64 is provided, but a plurality of first ball entrances 64 may be provided. In this case, the configuration may be such that the entry of the ball is suspended for each type of the first entry port 64 into which the ball has entered. Further, when the variation is executed in accordance with the reserved ball, the variation may be performed in the order in which the entered ball is entered without considering the type of the first entrance port 64, or when the retained ball exists, Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the first entrance 64 for performing the change with priority is provided. When a plurality of first entrance openings 64 are provided, the jackpot winning probability and the selection ratio of each large jackpot type may be changed according to the type of the first entrance opening 64.

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of a special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates a jackpot type (“normal jackpot”, “hour saving jackpot A”) if the jackpot is a jackpot. , "Hour-saving jackpot B", "special jackpot A", "special jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot A" to "probable variable jackpot H").

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), the display of the special symbol (first symbol) is changed and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 with the trigger as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. Columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is any of “normal jackpot”, “hour jackpot A”, “hour jackpot B”, “special jackpot A”, or “special jackpot B”, the even number “0, The variable display in which the main symbols to which "2, 4, 6, 8" is added is performed. In addition, in the case of “probably variable jackpot A”, “probably variable jackpot E” to “probably variable jackpot H”, fluctuations in which the main symbols to which odd numbers “1, 3, 5, 9” other than “7” are added are aligned. When the display is performed and if the "probable jackpot B" to "probable jackpot D" (that is, the 16 round probable jackpot that is most advantageous for the player), the main symbol with the odd number "7" is added. A uniform fluctuation display is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize the jackpot type only by checking the aligned main symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and a lower two-thirds is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (retained balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the big hit is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character is displayed. And an announcement performance is performed.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball in the 1st ball entrance 64 might be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, but three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed when a ball passes through the second entrance 67, is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67, a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" are alternately lit as the second symbol. A variable display is performed. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the pachinko machine 10 activates the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 for a predetermined time. It is configured so as to be in a state (opened), and as a result, the ball easily enters the first entrance hole 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and illuminated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. You. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the plurality of lamps on and off in the second symbol display device 83, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and the number of passing balls at the second entrance 67 is three or less, or five or more. (For example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the result of the drawing is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a normally closed is closed for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse, until ten balls are won, or until 0.5 seconds elapse, (Until 10 wins).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated a number of times corresponding to the type of big hit. The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203, a register 210 for temporarily storing data necessary for reading and writing when reading various data from the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 and writing various data to the RAM 203, and an interrupt circuit And various circuits such as a timer circuit and a data transmission / reception circuit. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c are stored. , A fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a game result setting table 202e, a state setting table 202f, a big hit end setting table 202g, and a big hit end clear table 202h.

  The first random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a large hit determination value of a first random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details of the first random number table 202a will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 6B) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type is set for each big hit type. The details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described later together with the description of the first hit type counter C2.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 6C) is a data table in which hit values of ordinary symbols are stored. The details of the second random number table 202c will be described later together with the description of the second random number counter C4.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is set for each display mode. In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol jackpot determination result, the game state, and the like are defined. For example, it is a table for selecting a fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit or a table for selecting a fluctuation pattern at the time of coming off. Also, there are a plurality of tables for selecting the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit, and the table selected for each big hit type is different. Further, there are a plurality of tables for selecting a variation pattern at the time of departure. For example, a table which is selected only after the end of the big hit is provided. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  In the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7), when a jackpot is won, the setting values such as the setting of the stop symbol indicating the jackpot and the operation pattern of the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a during the jackpot are displayed. It is a data table defined for each jackpot type. The game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7) is stored in the ROM 202 in the range of addresses "19D8H" to "1A2BH", and each address stores one byte of data. In the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7), the number (determination value number) of the determination values (random number values) of each jackpot type, the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs 37a (the number of display symbols), and the special symbol The information indicating the stop symbol (stop symbol information), the operation pattern of the special winning opening (large open mouth) 65a (large open mouth pattern), and the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d are selected. (Table selection information) indicating which one of a plurality of tables is selected for use in determining a variation pattern, and information (offset 1, offset 2) for determining a game state after a jackpot has ended. ). In FIG. 7, the address of the ROM 202 in which each data is specified is described in parentheses, but the upper byte of the address of the ROM 202 is omitted, and only the lower byte is described.

  In the pachinko machine 10, based on the winning of the big hit, the above setting values corresponding to the type of the winning big hit are stored in the various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 7) of the RAM 203 from the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7). 11). The details of the various setting value storage areas 203e will be described later. Then, based on the set values stored in the various set value storage area 203e, the MPU 201 performs various controls related to a change pattern effect that becomes a big hit and a big hit. In addition, in the various set value storage area 203e (see FIG. 11), in addition to a storage area for storing set values related to the game, offset 1 and offset 2 defined in the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7) are stored. An offset value storage area for storing an offset value calculated based on the offset value is provided. This offset value is a value used to set the game state after the end of the jackpot, and will be described in detail later. However, in the game result set value acquisition processing (see FIG. 17), the offset 1 and the offset 2 are referred to. It is a value calculated by:

  Specifically, in the big hit end process (see FIG. 26) executed when it is determined that the big hit end timing is reached, various setting values relating to the game state after the big hit end (whether or not to set the special symbol high probability state or not) Are set from the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8) and set in the various setting value storage areas 203e. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the random number value (counter value) itself acquired in accordance with the ball entry (starting winning) into the first ball entry port 64 continues to be held until the end of the jackpot, and the random number is counted. The game state after the end of the jackpot is not determined based on the numerical value (counter value), but the random number value (counter value) obtained with the ball entry (start winning) into the first entrance 64. Only the offset value selected based on the large hit is held.

  Here, when the random number value of the jackpot is held during the fluctuation pattern production at the time of the jackpot winning or during the subsequent jackpot state, the jackpot random number is read out by the unauthorized player, and the jackpot is won. A random value may be specified. Therefore, the timing at which the specified random number value appears is analyzed, and there is a possibility that the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the acquired random number value (counter value) is converted into an offset value and held until the end of the jackpot, and the game state after the end of the jackpot is set based on the offset value. With such a configuration, it is possible to limit the period in which the random number value itself serving as the special symbol jackpot is held to a short period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a random number value which becomes a jackpot of a special symbol to be obtained illegally from the outside, so that the timing at which the random number value which becomes a jackpot appears is analyzed, and a fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing is performed. Can be suppressed. Specifically, by setting the analyzed timing on a so-called hanging substrate, acquiring a random number at a timing when a random number value to be a big hit appears, and suppressing a fraudulent act of performing control so as to judge the success or failure of the big hit. Can be.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values relating to the game state after the end of the jackpot (set values indicating whether or not to be in a high probability state of a special symbol, a time-saving period of an ordinary symbol, etc.) are set to the jackpot winning. In this case, the offset value is not held during the fluctuation pattern effect at the time of the hit or during the subsequent jackpot state, but only the offset value indicating the storage position of various setting values in the state setting table 202f is held. . Rather than providing a storage area for temporarily storing all of the various setting values in the RAM 203, it is sufficient to provide an area for holding the offset value, so that the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. Can be.

  Next, the state setting table 202f of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. The state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8) is a table in which a game state that can be shifted after the end of the jackpot is defined for each offset value, and when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1207: Yes). Is a data table that is referred to in setting the game state after the end of the big hit in the big hit end processing (S1208) executed at the end of the game.

  The state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8) is stored in the range of addresses 1AD4H to 1AF3H of the ROM 202, and one byte of data is stored in each address. The state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8) includes information indicating whether to shift to the special symbol high-probability state after the end of the big hit (special lottery state), and shifts to the normal symbol time saving state after the end of the big hit. The information indicating whether or not to make it (normal symbol state), the time-saving period of the normal symbol given after the end of the big hit (the number of time savings), and the change pattern selection table 202d for selecting the mode of the change pattern after the big hit end The number of special symbol lotteries required to switch from the table for use to the table corresponding to the state (the number of times the variable pattern selection table is switched) is defined. In FIG. 8, the address of the ROM 202 in which each data is defined is described in parentheses, but the upper byte of the address of the ROM 202 is omitted, and only the lower byte is described.

  The information indicating whether or not to shift to the normal symbol time reduction state (normal symbol status) includes four types of states: a normal state, a time reduction state 1, a time reduction state 2, and a time reduction state 3. . When the normal state is set as the state of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the ordinary state of the ordinary symbol after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, if any of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3 is set, the state shifts to the normal symbol time saving state after the end of the big hit. In addition to the above, the four states are different from each other in a table used for determining a variation pattern after the number of times of switching the variation pattern selection table has elapsed. That is, when performing a variation pattern effect for deviation, which table is selected from a plurality of tables defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d and used to determine the variation pattern effect differs in each of the above four states. ing.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, based on the winning of the jackpot, the offset values calculated from the offset 1 and the offset 2 defined in the game result setting table 202e are stored in the offset value storage area, At the end of the jackpot, a set value corresponding to the offset value is extracted from the state setting table 202f and stored in the various set value storage area 203e.

  The random number value (counter value) acquired in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 is converted into a form of an offset value, held until the end of the jackpot, and based on the offset value. Since the game state after the end is set, the period in which the random number value itself serving as a special symbol jackpot is held can be limited to a short period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a random number value which becomes a jackpot of a special symbol to be obtained illegally from the outside, so that the timing at which the random number value which becomes a jackpot appears is analyzed, and a fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing is performed. Can be suppressed. Specifically, by setting the analyzed timing on a so-called hanging substrate, acquiring a random number at a timing when a random number value to be a big hit appears, and suppressing a fraudulent act of performing control so as to judge the success or failure of the big hit. Can be.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values (a lottery state of a special symbol, a state of a normal symbol, the number of times of saving, the number of times of changing the change pattern selection table) relating to the game state after the end of the big hit are set before the start of the big hit game. Instead of specifying and holding in advance, only the offset value indicating the storage position of each set value in the state setting table 202f is held, so that the RAM 203 holds the offset until the end of the jackpot. It is enough to provide only a storage area for holding the value. Therefore, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the jackpot end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) and the jackpot end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B) specified in the ROM 202 will be described. These tables are used in the big hit end process (see FIG. 26) to initialize the big hit middle setting values set in various setting value storage areas 203e, which will be described later, and rewrite them into the normal gaming state setting. Is a table in which the control data of the above is defined.

  The big hit end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) is a table stored in the range of addresses 1202H to 1204H of the ROM 202, and one byte of data is stored in each address. Specifically, addresses “1202H” to “1204H” of the ROM 202 include address data indicating a storage location of data to be reset in the various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 7), and the address data. The data for setting the storage location of the indicated data (the data for resetting the set value indicating the big hit) and the data for ending the processing for initializing the gaming state setting area are stored in the order of addresses. I have. Although details will be described later, in the data setting process (see FIG. 27), which is one of the jackpot end processes (see FIG. 26), the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 sets the jackpot end setting table 202g (see FIG. )), The stored data is read out in the order of the addresses in the ROM 202, and the control according to the stored data is executed. Specifically, when the address data is read, the address is set as a data setting destination address. When the set value data (data for resetting the set value) is read, the contents of the address set as the set destination address are reset (that is, “00H” is set to the set destination address). ). Further, when it is determined that the read data is data for terminating the process, the data setting process (see FIG. 27) is terminated.

  Next, the big hit end clear table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. The big hit end clear table 202h is a table stored in the ROM 202 in the range of addresses “1205H” to “1212H”, and each address defines an address of various set value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 11). I have. Although the details will be described later, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), which is one of the jackpot end processes, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores the stored data in the order of the addresses of the ROM 202 from the jackpot end clear table 202h. "00H" (initial value data) is set as a set value at the address indicated by the read stored data (address data). If the data read from the big hit end clear table 202h is “00H”, the zero setting process ends.

  In the big hit end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B), the setting destination addresses of the various setting value storage areas 203e and the setting data (ie, “00H”) for setting the setting destination addresses are defined. In such a configuration, there is a problem that the data amount of the clear table 202h at the end of the big hit increases. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the process of defining only the setting destination address in the big hit end clear table 202h and setting “00H” to the setting destination address is performed by the control program of the MPU 201. Stipulated in Therefore, the data amount of the big hit end clear table 202h can be reduced, so that the data amount stored in the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the data setting process (see FIG. 27) or the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), the control program sets the number of times of setting data in the various setting value storage areas 203e. Is not described, and the processing is not terminated when it is determined that the data setting for the set number of times is completed. Instead, the data “00H” is stored in the big hit end setting table 202g and the big hit end clear table 202h. It is configured to terminate the processing when it is determined that the data has been read out.

  If the number of set values is described in the control program, the control program designer newly counts the number of set values each time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as diversion of the program to another model. It becomes necessary to rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, it takes time and effort to count the set values, and if the designer makes a mistake, the incorrect number of repetitions is specified in the control program, so that the setting at the end of the jackpot is completed normally. And the pachinko machine 10 may malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is only necessary to define “00H” as data at the end of the jackpot end setting table 202g and the jackpot end clearing table 202h, so that when designing the control program, The possibility that a designer makes a mistake can be reduced. Therefore, the setting of the data at the end of the big hit can be executed more reliably based on the control program, and the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  Next, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters and flags for controlling the processing of the main control device 110, a storage area for storing set values, and the like. Here, the processing of the main control device 110 includes a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a third symbol display. This is main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of display in the device 81.

  First, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second random number counter C4 is used for the normal symbol lottery, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 13), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance port. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any one of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number which is a big hit of the special symbol is set by a first random number table 202a (see FIG. 6A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. If the value matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and for a high probability of a special symbol having a higher probability of being a big hit than the low probability. And the number of random hits included in each of them is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for a special symbol with a high probability and the first random number table 202a2 for a special symbol with a low probability (not shown) are provided by the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 149). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 149 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 149), the counter returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first one The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there are three random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random number value “7, 107, 282” is the first random number value for the low probability. It is stored in the hit random number table 202a. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of the random numbers is three and the total number of the random numbers to be the big hit is three, so the probability of the big hit of the special symbol is “1/100”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are thirty random numbers which are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the value is “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”are first random number tables for high probability. 202a. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300 and the total number of jackpot random numbers is 30, so the probability of the special symbol jackpot is "1/10".

  In this embodiment, the random number value of the big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability and the random number of the big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability are stored. In order to prevent the values from being duplicated with the numerical values, a random number value for each jackpot is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as the random number value of the jackpot, the timing at which the value appears is analyzed, and the jackpot is illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. There is a possibility that it becomes easier. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random number value to be a big hit is changed depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state or the special symbol low probability state). Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value which is a special symbol jackpot to be predicted, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 149. Then, as shown in FIG. 6B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 19” is “normal big hit”. When the value is “20-29”, the jackpot type is “hour saving jackpot A”, and when the value is “30-39”, the jackpot type is “hour saving jackpot B”. When the value is “40 to 69”, the jackpot type is “special jackpot A”, and when the value is “70 to 97”, the jackpot type is “special jackpot B”.

  Furthermore, when the random number value is “98,99”, the jackpot type is “probable variable jackpot A”, and when the value is “100 to 102”, the jackpot type is “probable variable jackpot B”. Is "103-105", the jackpot type is "probable jackpot C", and if the value is "106-113", the jackpot type is "probable jackpot D". When the value is "114 to 129", the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot E", and when the value is "130 to 145", the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot F". If it is "146,147", the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot G", and if the value is "148,149", the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot H".

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment uses the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2 to determine the thirteen types of hit types (normal jackpot, hourly jackpot A, hourly jackpot B, extra jackpot A, and extra jackpot B). , The jackpot A to the jackpot H) are determined. In addition, the random number value for determining the special jackpot type from the value of the first hit type counter C2 (random value) is set by a special symbol jackpot type table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99) and "reach other than front and rear out" (e.g., in the range of 90-97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than before and after the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the stop type selection counter C3 value (random number value) is set in a stop type selection table (not shown). This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and the range of the random number value set for each type of stop according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely off”. In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 98, 99 and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “reach out of front and back” or “reach other than front and rear out”. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 79, which is a small low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, a lot of reach displays with a long rendering time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach out of order” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 6A) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided within.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, “variation (for long time)”, “variation (for short time)”, various types of “normal reach”, “variation of super reach”, “variation” Various types of "special reach" are stipulated, and as the fluctuation pattern for big hits, various "normal hits", various "super reach", and various types of "special reach" are specified. , Various "shared super reach", various "shared special reach".

  As described above, the variation pattern selection table 202d is composed of a plurality of tables according to the state of the pachinko machine 10. For example, when a jackpot is won, the table to be selected is different depending on the jackpot type, and which table is used for selecting the variation pattern is determined in the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7) for each jackpot type. It is determined according to the specified table selection information. If the table for selecting the variation pattern is different, for example, among the various types of "winning super reach", the type of "winning super reach" that is easily selected by a specific jackpot type or the "winning super reach" selected only by a specific jackpot type A type of “reach” can be provided. Therefore, the jackpot type can be predicted from the type of the fluctuation pattern, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Also, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the table used to select the variation pattern is different depending on whether the state of the ordinary symbol is the normal state or the time saving state 1 to 3 It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the current game state can be predicted from the type of the fluctuation pattern.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of being performed, and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a hit for the ordinary symbol is set by a second random number table (see FIG. 6C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. If the value of the random number matches the value of the winning set in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. The second random number table 202c is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the symbol is in the normal state) and a high probability (normal symbol) in which the probability of hitting the symbol is higher than the low probability. ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 6C, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers which are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "5-28". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 24 out of 240 in the total number of random numbers, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has the low probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The ROM 202 stores a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 13). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 24).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 10, a stack area in which the contents of the register 210 of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register of the register 210 are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 24), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 23). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , The NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203d, and various settings. It has a value storage area 203e and a probability change flag 203f.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4th reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the ball wins in the first entrance 64 (start winning), and as soon as the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 are obtained in accordance with the starting winning, the jackpot lottery of the original special symbol is performed. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. As described above, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning. The prediction is described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. It should be noted that the various types of information correspond to pass / fail, stop type, change pattern, and the like.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the prize information command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts the success / failure, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command, and uses them as prize information as the prize information storage area of the RAM 223. 223a.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding area). Of the vacant areas in the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winning prize stored in the other reserved area is stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases by 1 to a maximum value of four. They are added (see S604 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 14).

  The value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 18 and S605 in FIG. 20). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to display the variable display reserved ball retained in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of retained balls of the variable display, which is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is the actual number of retained balls of the variable display retained by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has shifted, the shift can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d counts the number of waiting balls (the number of times of waiting) of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. The counter counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S804 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S705 in FIG. 20).

  If the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67 and the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S805 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b. No (S803: No in FIG. 21).

  The various setting value storage area 203e is a storage area in which various setting values, flags, counters, and the like for executing main processing of the pachinko machine 10 are stored. The MPU 201 performs control based on data stored in various setting value storage areas 203e. The various setting value storage area 203e will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the various setting value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 11, the various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 11) correspond to the range of addresses “F000H” to “F0FFH” of the RAM 203. In the various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 11), the firing control signal setting value storage area assigned to the address “F000H” in the RAM 203 stores a setting value for controlling the firing of a ball. The launch of a ball to the game area is controlled based on a set value stored in this area.

  The display LED setting area assigned to the address “F009H” of the RAM 203 is a storage area in which the setting value of the lighting pattern for lighting the display LED is stored, and based on the setting value stored in this area. To light the display LED.

  The test signal setting area 1 and the test signal setting area 2 respectively assigned to the addresses “F01DH” and “F01EH” are storage areas for storing setting values for outputting various test signals. As the test signal, for example, there are a signal for performing an operation test of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and a signal for performing an operation test at the time of a big hit. Since the signal is a test signal, a setting is made such that no signal is output while the player is playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 (that is, “00H” is set as the set value in the test signal setting areas 1 and 2).

  The maximum round number setting area assigned to the address “F030H” is an area for setting the number of rounds of a big hit. For example, when the number of jackpot rounds, such as the probability variable jackpot E, is won in the jackpot type of two rounds, “02H” is set as the set value, and the number of jackpot rounds, such as the special jackpot A and the special jackpot B, is set. When the jackpot is won in eight rounds, the set value is "08H". When the number of rounds of the jackpot, such as a normal jackpot or a time-saving jackpot A, is 16 jackpots, the set value is "10H". Is set.

  The game state setting area assigned to the address “F035H” of the RAM 203 is a storage area in which a set value indicating the current game state is stored. For example, if the stored set value is “01H” When the special symbol is changing, "02H" indicates that the special symbol is being confirmed and displayed, and "03H" indicates that the jackpot is being hit and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is being closed. If it is "04H", it indicates that the jackpot is being hit and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is being opened. If “00H”, the special symbol is in a state other than the above (that is, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a state from the end of the big hit to the start of the change of the special symbol, or in a state where there is no reserved ball). After a lapse of a certain period of time).

  The jackpot flag assigned to the address “F090H” is a flag indicating whether or not the game is currently in a jackpot state (special game state), and if it is on (ie, the stored data is “01H”). If it is off (that is, if the stored data is “00H”), the state other than the special symbol jackpot (that is, the special symbol) is shown. (Fluctuating state, demonstration state, etc.). The storage areas allocated to the following addresses “F091H” to “F094H” are areas for setting data read from the state setting table 202f of the ROM 202.

  First, the probable change state flag assigned to the address “F091H” is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is currently undergoing probable change, and if it is on (ie, the stored data is “01H”). If so, it indicates that the special symbol is being changed, and if it is off (ie, if the stored data is “00H”), it indicates that the special symbol is in a low probability state. .

  The time-saving state flag assigned to the address “F092H” indicates whether or not the time of the normal symbol is being reduced, and is a set value for designating a table for selecting the mode of the variation pattern at the time of departure. Is stored. If the flag is “00H”, it indicates that the symbol is in the normal state, and if the flag is “01H”, it indicates that the symbol is in the time saving state 1 of the symbol, and if the flag is “02H”. If the flag is "03H", it indicates that it is the time reduction state 3 of the ordinary symbol. As described above, the time saving states 1 to 3 of the ordinary symbols differ in that the tables used to select the variation pattern when the variation is lost after the number of times the variation pattern selection table has been switched are different from each other. . As described above, the tables are all defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d.

  The time-saving state counter assigned to the address “F093H” shifts to the special symbol low-probability state after the end of the big hit, and when the normal symbol shifts to the time-saving state, how many times the normal symbol has been reduced. This is a counter that indicates whether or not it is running. When the special symbol is shifted to the high probability state after the end of the big hit, the time saving state of the ordinary symbol continues until the next jackpot is won, but the time saving state counter is 0 regardless of the number of lotteries of the special symbol. is there. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the probability change state flag is ON or the value of the time reduction state counter is 1 or more, the control of the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is executed.

  The change selection state counter assigned to the address “F094H” is a counter that indicates the number of remaining special symbol lotteries until the table for selecting the change pattern effect is switched to another table. If the value of this counter is 1 or more, a variation pattern selection table dedicated to after the jackpot is selected as a table for selecting a variation pattern at the time of disconnection. On the other hand, when the value of the variation selection state counter is 0, the variation pattern is determined from a table corresponding to the gaming state indicated by the time reduction state flag.

  The offset value storage area assigned to the address “F095H” is a storage area for storing the offset value, and the set value after the jackpot is read from the state setting table 202f based on the stored offset value. , Are set to addresses “F091H” to “F094H” of the RAM 203, respectively. This offset value is calculated from each of the offset 1 and offset 2 read from the game result table 202e when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit in the lottery, and is stored in the offset value storage area. In addition, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) executed after the setting value is read out from the state setting table 202f and the setting is completed, the initial value “00H” is overwritten.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various random numbers (counter values) obtained when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning) are converted into the form of an offset value and the offset value is stored. Since the game state is stored in the area and the game state after the end of the big hit is set based on the offset value, the period in which the random number value itself as the big hit of the special symbol is held is limited to a short period. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a random number value which is a special symbol jackpot to be illegally acquired from the outside. Therefore, it is possible to analyze a timing at which a random number value that becomes a jackpot is analyzed, and to suppress an illegal act of illegally assigning a jackpot based on the analyzed timing. Specifically, by setting the analyzed timing on a so-called hanging substrate, acquiring a random number at a timing when a random number value to be a big hit appears, and suppressing a fraudulent act of performing control so as to judge the success or failure of the big hit. Can be. The various random numbers (counter values) refer to the first random number counter C1 and the first random number counter C1 stored in each counter buffer of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning). It means the values of the hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the like.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values (special symbol lottery state, ordinary symbol state, time savings, fluctuations) to be set at the addresses “F091H” to “F094H” as the game state after the end of the big hit The number of times of switching the pattern selection table) is not specified and held in advance before the start of the jackpot game, but only an offset value indicating a storage position of various set values in the state setting table 202f is held. With the configuration, it is sufficient to provide only a storage area for one byte of the offset value storage area in the RAM 203. Therefore, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently.

  The large open mouth setting area assigned to the address “F096H” is a storage area in which a set value indicating the open pattern of the special winning opening (large open mouth) 65a during the big hit is stored. (If the jackpot flag is on). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, five types of setting values of “00H” to “04H” are provided, and when the setting value is “00H”, the round hits 16 rounds, and when the setting value is “01H”, the round hits 8 rounds. , "02H", a 16-round short open jackpot (a 16-round jackpot in which a specific winning opening (large open port) 65a is opened for a maximum of 0.5 seconds in each round), "03H" a 2-round jackpot, “04H” corresponds to two round short open jackpots (two round jackpots in which the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is opened for a maximum of 0.5 seconds in each round).

  The stop symbol code information storage area assigned to the address “F097H” is an area for setting the information on the stop symbol of the special symbol based on the result of the lottery of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is off, a stop symbol code indicating a stop symbol corresponding to the departure is set, and when the lottery result is a hit, a stop symbol code corresponding to the big hit type is read from the game result setting table 202e. Issued and set. Then, at the end of the change of the special symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the set value set in the stop symbol code information storage area is definitely displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

  Addresses “F09FH” to “F0FFH” are unused areas, and data stored in these areas is fixed at “00H”. It should be noted that various setting values are assigned to addresses other than those described above in the various setting value storage area 203e. Although description is omitted, for example, various counters such as a winning counter for counting the number of balls winning the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and a time for switching display of a normal symbol in a fluctuation effect of a normal symbol are measured. Various timers such as a normal symbol display switching timer are assigned.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to centrally store various set values, counters, timers, and the like in the various set value storage areas 203e where the upper byte of the address of the RAM 203 is F0H. A ring buffer for storing commands (for example, a fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command) to be output to the sound lamp control device 113, etc., a special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol retaining ball number storage area 203b, a stack area For example, the upper byte of the address in the RAM 203 is stored at an address other than “F0H” (for example, an address whose upper byte is “F1H”).

  Next, the register 210 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The register 210 is used to temporarily store address data and set value data and to perform arithmetic processing on the stored set values when reading data from the ROM 202 or the RAM 203 or writing set values to the RAM 203. It is. As shown in FIG. 12, a register 210 includes an accumulator 210a capable of executing an arithmetic operation on stored data and general-purpose registers 210b1, 210b2, 210c1, 210c2, 210d1, and 210d2 capable of storing address data and set value data. And a flag register 210e for storing various flags, and an address holding register 210f for storing the upper byte (F0H) of the address of the various setting value storage area 203e as a fixed value. Note that the accumulator 210a can also be used for temporarily storing data, like the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2.

  Each of the registers provided in the register 210 is configured to be able to hold 1-byte data. The general-purpose register 210b1 and the general-purpose register 210b2, the general-purpose register 210c1 and the general-purpose register 210c2, and the general-purpose register 210d1 and the general-purpose register 210d2 can be used as a pair. That is, the configuration is such that a total of 2 bytes of data can be stored in each pair of registers. As the data of 2 bytes, for example, address data of the ROM 202, address data of the RAM 203, and the like correspond.

  In the flag register 210e, a different flag is provided for each bit of 1 byte. The provided flag is, for example, a zero flag that is turned off if the operation result after executing the instruction is a value other than zero, and turned on if the operation result is zero, or data stored in any of various general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2. There is provided a load flag or the like that is turned off if the data is other than "00H" and turned on if it is "00H".

  Hereinafter, control when reading and writing data will be described. Here, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with various instructions for executing various controls of the main control device 110, and reads and writes data by using one of the various instructions. Performed using Specifically, for example, a transfer instruction is provided that specifies a read source and a setting destination, and transfers data stored in the transfer source to the setting destination.

  In this transfer instruction, at least one of the reading source and the setting destination needs to specify the accumulator 210a provided in the register 210 or any of the general-purpose registers (general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2). is there. Therefore, for example, when reading data specified at the address “1ADAH” of the ROM 202 and storing the read data at the address “F093H” of the RAM 203, it is necessary to perform data transfer via the general-purpose register 210b1, for example. Specifically, first, the address “1ADAH” is read from, the general-purpose register 210b1 is set as the setting destination, and the data specified by the address “1ADAH” is stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 using a transfer instruction. Then, with the general-purpose register 210b1 as a read source and the address “F093H” as a setting destination, a transfer instruction is performed again to set the data stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 to the address “F093H”. By performing such control, the data specified at the address “1ADAH” of the ROM 202 can be transferred to the address “F093H” of the RAM 203 via the general-purpose register 210b1.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a 2-byte read instruction (load instruction) is provided as a transfer instruction that can be accepted by the MPU 201. The two-byte read instruction (load instruction) is an instruction for reading data specified at a specified read source and transferring the data to a specified setting destination. In the two-byte read command, an address of the ROM 202 or the RAM 203 can be specified as a read source or a setting destination. In this case, it is necessary to specify both the upper byte and the lower byte of the address of the ROM 202 or the RAM 203.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, similarly to the two-byte read instruction (load instruction), the one-byte read instruction, which is an instruction to read data specified in the specified read source and transfer the data to the specified destination, is used. Instructions are provided. The difference between this one-byte read instruction and the two-byte read instruction (load instruction) is that it is used when data is read from a specific storage area or when data is transferred to a specific storage area. Note that the specific storage area refers to a storage area in which the fixed value data stored in the address holding register 210f is used as the upper byte of the address. As described above, since “F0H” is stored in the address holding register 210f, the one-byte read instruction is executed in an area whose address is in the range of “F000H” to “F0FFH”, that is, the various setting value storage areas of the RAM 203. It is used when data is transferred to the memory 203e or when data is read from the various setting value storage areas 203e.

  The 1-byte read instruction is defined to include the meaning that the upper byte of the address reads and writes from the area of “F0H”. Therefore, when the read source or the setting destination address is specified, the upper byte of the address is specified. It is only necessary to omit the bytes and write only the lower byte of the address in the program, which is advantageous in that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Here, when performing various settings, such as a setting at the start of the change, a setting during the big hit, and a setting after the big hit, data is set in the various set value storage area 203e. For this reason, in the control program, the process of setting some data in the various setting value storage areas 203e is frequently described. If all these settings are described by a 2-byte read instruction, there is a problem that the program capacity increases. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the MPU 201 is configured to be able to read the above-mentioned 1-byte read command, and all the upper bytes of the addresses of the various setting value storage areas 203e are “F0H”. Thus, the data storage position of the RAM 203 is adjusted. Thereby, a command for setting data in the various setting value storage areas 203e where the setting process is frequently performed in the game by the pachinko machine 10 can be described by a 1-byte read command in the control program. Therefore, when there are a plurality of upper bytes of the address of the various setting value storage area 203e (for example, some data is stored in an area where the upper byte of the address is “F0H”, and The size of the control program can be reduced as compared with the case where the control program is stored in the area “F1H”.

  Here, the difference between the 2-byte read instruction and the 1-byte read instruction will be described more specifically, taking as an example a case where the data stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 is stored at the address “F093H” of the RAM 203.

  In the 2-byte read instruction, data indicating the general-purpose register 210b1 is specified as a read source, and an address “F093H” is specified as a setting destination, thereby setting data stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 to an address “F093H”. can do. In other words, in one transfer instruction, it is necessary to describe a total of 3 bytes of data of 1-byte data indicating the general-purpose register 210b1 and “F093H” which is 2-byte address data in the program.

  On the other hand, when the one-byte read instruction is used, the data indicating the general-purpose register 210b1 is specified as the read source in common with the two-byte read instruction, but as the setting destination, the lower byte of the address “F093H” is used. The difference is that only certain “93H” needs to be designated. In other words, in a single transfer instruction, it is sufficient to describe 2-byte data of 1-byte data indicating the general-purpose register 210b1 and 1-byte address data "93H". The amount of program description can be reduced by one byte. Further, in the various set value storage area 203e, various set values related to the game, such as the set value related to the launch of the ball, the set value related to the LED 37a, the set value of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the like are stored. Data is frequently read and written. Therefore, in the control program of the pachinko machine 10, a description of a transfer instruction that specifies any address in the various setting value storage area 203e as a read source or a setting destination frequently appears. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced by using a one-byte read instruction instead of a two-byte read instruction for all of these transfer instructions.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the various setting value storage areas 203e in which data is frequently set are configured so that the upper byte of the address in the RAM 203 is within the range of "F0H". Accordingly, “F0H” is selected as the read source or the setting destination upper address when the one-byte read instruction is executed in accordance with this, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, the address of the various setting value storage area 203e is set to “FF00H” to “FFFFH”, and in accordance with this, “FFH” is set as the read source when executing the 1-byte read instruction or the upper address of the setting destination. May be selected. When the upper address of the read source or the setting destination is changed to “FFH”, “FFH” may be stored as fixed value data in the address holding register 202f.

  In addition, for example, the upper byte of the frequently read address of the ROM 202 is set as a read source or an upper address of a setting destination when a 1-byte read instruction is executed (that is, a fixed value is set in the address holding register 202f). (Set as data). Examples of the address that is frequently read include, for example, the address of the first random number table 202a which is referred to each time a special symbol is drawn, and the game result setting table 202e which is referred each time a special symbol is determined to be a big hit. Address.

  In the above example, when the upper byte of the address of the game result setting table 202e is stored as fixed value data, the game result setting table 202e is stored in the ROM 202 at addresses "19D1H" to "1A2BH". When reading data, there are a case where the upper byte of the address is "19H" and a case where it is "1AH". On the other hand, since only one-byte data can be stored in the address holding register 202f, only one of “19H” and “1AH” can be stored in the address holding register 202f. On the other hand, the address of the ROM 202 in which the game result setting table 202e is defined may be shifted, and all data may be defined in a range where the upper byte of the address is common.

  Further, the configuration is such that a set value is set in a storage area in which the upper byte of the address is different according to the game state to be changed, and the target area when executing the 1-byte transfer instruction is changed according to the game state. May be configured. For example, among the various set value storage areas 203e, the set value for setting the gaming state during the jackpot is such that the upper byte of the address is stored in a range of “F0H” and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set. The set value is stored in a range where the upper byte of the address is “F1H”. When setting the gaming state during the jackpot, the fixed value “F0H” is overwritten in the address holding register 202f, and data is read / written from the area where the upper byte of the address is “F0H” in the 1-byte read instruction. What is necessary is just to set it. On the other hand, when setting the gaming state after the jackpot at the end of the jackpot, the fixed value “F1H” is overwritten in the address holding register 202f, and data is read / written from the area where the upper byte of the address is “F1H” in the 1-byte read instruction. What is necessary is just to set so that it can do. As a result, the data to be stored in the various setting value storage areas 203e increases, and even when all the data cannot be accommodated in the area where the upper byte of the address is the same, the one-byte read instruction is used. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a continuous announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern table 222a that defines a plurality of variation pattern effect modes to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When a variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is received, the corresponding variation pattern mode is selected from variation pattern table 222a. The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, and a stop type selection flag 223d.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 wins a start, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning is obtained. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various kinds of information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, change pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and the prize information is used as the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area with the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. A counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standbys) of the variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1808 in FIG. 31). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1802 in FIG. 31), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 32). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1805 in FIG. 31), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 32). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command, and the set stop type is displayed for display. The display control device 114 is notified by the stop type command.

  The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Effects) and the like.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), A start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the ball passes through the second entrance 67 through the through gate. The processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and fires the ball on condition that the hitting switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, the special symbol change process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: S204). No), this process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball count command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1101) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After the command of the number of reserved balls is set by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a big hit determination process is performed for performing a lottery to determine whether or not a special symbol is a big hit based on the data shifted to the execution area (S208). The big hit determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a jackpot setting process (S308) described later with reference to FIG. 16 or a loss setting process (S309) described later with reference to FIG.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S211). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), the start of the jackpot according to the jackpot type is set (S212).

  In the processing of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving state counter stored in the various setting value storage area 203e is 1 or more (S213). If the value of the time reduction status counter is 1 or more (S213: Yes), the value of the time reduction status counter is decremented by 1 (S214), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction state counter is 0 (S213: No), the process of S214 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, the jackpot determination process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the jackpot determination process (S208). The big hit determination process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters, a lottery of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol loss” is performed (whether or not), and fluctuations performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining an effect pattern of an effect (a fluctuation effect pattern).

  In the jackpot determination process, first, a first random number table 202a2 (not shown) for low probability is selected from the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit. (S301). Thereafter, the probable change state flag stored in the various set value storage area 203e is read out (S302), and it is determined whether or not the probable change state flag indicates a high probability state of the special symbol (S303).

  As a result of the processing in S303, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the high probability state (S303: Yes), the first random number table 202a1 for the high probability is obtained from the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202. (Not shown), a new table is set instead of the first random number table 202a2 for low probability as a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit (S304), and the process proceeds to S305. I do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the high probability state (ie, the special symbol is in the low probability state) as a result of the process of S303 (S303: No), the process of S304 is skipped and the process proceeds to S305. I do.

In the process of S305, the value of the first random number counter C1 is read out from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 (S305), and the read value of the first random number counter C1 is read from S1.
A comparison is made with a table (table of comparison source) for determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit set in the processing of S301 or S304 (S306).

  As described above, in the first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for the high probability time, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78" is set as a random number value which is a jackpot of a special symbol. , 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 " In the first probability random number table 202a2 (not shown) for low probability, three random numbers of "7, 107, 282" are set as the random numbers to be the big hit of the special symbol. In the processing of S306, among these tables, the random number value specified in the table set as the comparison source table is compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 one by one.

  Based on the comparison, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches one of the random numbers specified in the comparison source table (S307). If there is a special jackpot (that is, in the case of a special symbol jackpot), a jackpot setting process for setting the variation pattern at the time of the jackpot and the control during the jackpot is executed (S308), and the process proceeds to S310. I do. On the other hand, when there is no matching random number value in the process of S307 (that is, in the case of the special symbol being out of place), the out-of-offset setting process for setting the mode of the variation pattern at the time of the out-of-out is executed (S309). The process proceeds to S310. The details of the jackpot setting process (S308) and the out-of-match setting process (S309) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, in the process of S310, the various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared (S310), and this process ends. Since various counter values are cleared in the process of S310, even if a big hit occurs, the random number value (counter value) to be a big hit can be cleared before the big hit state is started. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a random number value which becomes a jackpot of a special symbol to be obtained illegally from the outside, so that the timing at which the random number value which becomes a jackpot appears is analyzed, and a fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing is performed. Can be suppressed. Specifically, by setting the analyzed timing on a so-called hanging substrate, acquiring a random number at a timing when a random number value to be a big hit appears, and suppressing a fraudulent act of performing control so as to judge the success or failure of the big hit. Can be. In the present embodiment, various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared during the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 15). However, the present invention is not limited to this. It should be cleared before it is recognized that it becomes. Therefore, for example, a process of clearing the counter buffer may be executed during the fluctuation effect or before the symbol stops.

  In the present embodiment, the first random number table for the low probability state is set once in the process of S301 regardless of whether the special symbol is in the high probability state or not. This is for setting a table for comparison. In other words, if any of the first random number tables (the first random number table 202a1 for the high probability or the first random number table 202a2 for the low probability) is not set, the influence of noise or the like may occur. Even if a problem occurs in which the processing of S303 or S304, which is an intermediate processing, is skipped, the big hit is determined based on the first random number table 202a2 for low probability set at the beginning of the big hit determination processing. Pass / fail can be determined.

  Next, the jackpot setting process (S308) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the big hit setting process is a process for setting the mode of the big hit variation pattern and the control during the big hit.

  In this processing, first, the jackpot flag of the various setting value storage area 203e is set to ON (S401), and thereafter, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the jackpot of the currently won jackpot is obtained. The type is specified (S402). Specifically, the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first big hit type counter C2 is specified based on the first big hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 6B). For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80”, since the counter value is in the range of “70” to “97”, the current big hit type is specified as the special big hit B. Further, for example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “140”, the counter value is in the range of “130” to “145”, and thus the present big hit type is specified as the probability variable big hit F.

  Next, the set value corresponding to the specified jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e of the ROM 202, and the read set value is set in the corresponding storage area of the various set value storage area 203e of the RAM 203 (S403). The process moves to S404. Here, as setting values to be read from the game result setting table 202e and set in the various setting value storage areas 203e, the lighting pattern of the LED 37a (the number of display symbols), information (stop symbol code) indicating the stop symbol of the special symbol, and the like. And information for specifying a table for selecting the mode of the variation pattern from the variation pattern selection table 202d (table selection information), and a control pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (large opening pattern). And the like.

  As described above, when setting value data is read from the ROM 202 and set in the RAM 203, first, the data of the transfer source address and the data of the setting destination address are stored in one of the general-purpose registers of the register 210. Store temporarily. Then, the setting value data read from the ROM 202 based on the data of the stored source address is temporarily stored in one of the general-purpose registers in which the address data is not stored, and then the setting destination address is stored. The setting value is transferred (set) to the address of the RAM 203 indicated by the data of (1). In the process of S403, the transfer control via the register 210 is repeated by the number of set value data to be transferred.

  In the process of S402, the jackpot type is specified from the random number value (counter value), and in the process of S403, various setting values are determined based on the specified jackpot type. And various setting values may be directly associated with each other and defined. That is, a table that defines the range of the random number value (counter value) and the corresponding various setting values may be provided in the ROM 202, and the setting value may be directly specified from the random number value with reference to this table. .

  In the process of S404, the mode of the variation pattern is selected by reading the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and comparing it with a table specified based on the table selection information (S404). Then, a variation pattern command based on the selected variation pattern is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S405). The fluctuation pattern command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201.

  After the setting of the fluctuation pattern, at the end of the jackpot, a game result setting acquisition process for acquiring and setting offset information as information for setting a game state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S406). This processing ends.

  Subsequently, the game result setting acquisition process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. The game result setting acquisition process (S406) is a process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and is a process for holding the offset value based on the result of the lottery of the special symbol in the RAM 203.

  In the game result setting acquisition process (S406), first, the value of offset 1 based on the current jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e and set as an offset value (S501). Here, "set as an offset value" means that the value of offset 1 or offset 2 read from the game result setting table 202e of the ROM 202 is temporarily stored in the accumulator 210a. In the processing of S501, the value of offset 1 is not stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2 but is stored in the accumulator 210a because of the offset stored in the processing of S506 and the processing of S507 described later. This is for performing arithmetic processing on the value.

  Similarly, the value of offset 2 based on the current jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e and stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2 (S502). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state counter is 0 (that is, whether or not the current jackpot has been won during the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol given after winning the various time reduction jackpots). (S503).

  In the processing of S503, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter is not 0 (S503: No), the value of offset 2 stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2 is stored in the accumulator 210a. The existing data is overwritten (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. On the other hand, in the process of S503, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter is 0 (S503: Yes), the process of S504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S505.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types (special jackpot A, special jackpot B) that shift to different gaming states after the jackpot is completed depending on whether or not to win during the time saving state of the ordinary symbol given after various time saving jackpots. ) Is provided. Specifically, if the special jackpot A or the special jackpot B is won during the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol given after the various time-saving jackpots, the state shifts to the special symbol high probability state after the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, if the special jackpot A or the special jackpot B is won in any other state, the state shifts to the special symbol low-probability state and the normal symbol time-saving state after the end of the jackpot. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the offset 1 or the offset 2 is defined in association with each of the two game states that can be shifted after the end of the jackpot.

  In the process of S505, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state (S505). If it is determined that the special symbol is in the high probability state (S505: Yes), the offset stored in the accumulator 210a is determined. An arithmetic process for exchanging the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits of the value is performed (S506), and the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, in the processing of S505, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the high probability state (that is, the special symbol is in the low probability state) (S505: No), the processing of S506 is skipped and the processing shifts to the processing of S507. I do.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a jackpot type (hour-saving jackpot A) in which the number of times of saving of the ordinary symbol given after the end of the jackpot is different depending on whether or not to win during the special symbol high probability state. More specifically, if the time-saving jackpot A is won during the special symbol high-probability state, the normal symbol time-saving state is set from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery is performed 30 times. When the time-saving jackpot A is won during the special symbol low probability state, the normal symbol time saving state is set only after the jackpot is completed and until the special symbol lottery is performed 20 times. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the upper 4 bits or lower 4 bits of the offset value are defined in association with each of the two game states that can be shifted after the end of the jackpot.

  In the processing of S507, the lower 4 bits of the offset value stored in the accumulator 210a are extracted and stored in the offset value storage area of the various setting value storage areas 203e provided in the RAM 203 (S507). finish. Here, "extracting the lower 4 bits" means to take the logical product of the data stored in the accumulator 210a and "0FH". Regardless of the value of the upper 4 bits of the data stored in the accumulator 210a, the upper 4 bits become "0H" (that is, "0000B") by performing a logical AND operation with "0FH" (that is, "00001111B"). )), Only the lower 4 bits of the data stored in the accumulator 210a remain.

  The offset value stored in the offset value storage area of the various setting value storage area 203e in the process of S507 is retained until the jackpot end timing, and the jackpot end process (FIG. 26) is a process for setting the state after the jackpot end. ) Is used to determine data to be read from the state setting table 202f.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a random number value (counter value) acquired in accordance with the ball entry (start winning) into the first entrance hole 64 is converted into an offset value and stored in the offset value storage area. In addition, since the game state after the end of the jackpot is set based on the offset value, the period in which the random number value itself serving as the jackpot of the special symbol is held can be limited to a short period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a random number value which becomes a jackpot of a special symbol to be obtained illegally from the outside, so that the timing at which the random number value which becomes a jackpot appears is analyzed, and a fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing is performed. Can be suppressed. Specifically, by setting the analyzed timing on a so-called hanging substrate, acquiring a random number at a timing when a random number value to be a big hit appears, and suppressing a fraudulent act of performing control so as to judge the success or failure of the big hit. Can be.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values to be set at the addresses F091H to F094H as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot (special symbol lottery state, ordinary symbol state, number of working hours, variation pattern selection table switching) The number of times is not specified and held in advance before the start of the big hit game, but only the offset value indicating the storage position of various setting values in the state setting table 202f is held. It is sufficient to provide only a storage area for one byte of the offset value storage area in the RAM 203. Therefore, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of offset 1 is stored in the accumulator 210a in the processing of S501, and the value of offset 2 is stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2 in the processing of S502. However, the value of offset 1 and the value of offset 2 are stored in any pair register (general-purpose register 210b1 and general-purpose register 210b2, general-purpose register 210c1 and general-purpose register 210c2, or general-purpose register 210d1 and general-purpose register 210d2). It may be stored in a lump. Then, when it is determined that the time-saving state counter is 0 in the processing of S503 (S503: Yes), the value of the offset 1 stored in the pair register may be stored in the accumulator 210a.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the offset 2 is temporarily stored in any of the general-purpose registers before the value of the time-saving state counter is determined to be 0. If it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter is not 0 (S503: No), the value of the offset 2 may be stored. Thereby, when the time reduction state counter is 0 (S503: Yes), not only the processing of S504 but also the processing corresponding to the processing of S502 can be omitted, so that the processing load can be reduced. .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the offset 2 stored in any one of the general-purpose registers is not erased by the processing of S502. It may be configured to delete the offset 2 value that has been set. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 caused by erroneously referencing the general-purpose register storing the value of the offset 2 in another process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the out-of-position setting process (S309) executed when the current lottery result is determined to be out of the special symbol in the big hit determination process (S208) will be described.

  In the out-of-office setting process, first, a table to be used for determining a variation pattern is specified (S501). Specifically, referring to the state of the time reduction state flag in the various setting value storage area 203e and the counter value of the fluctuation selection state counter, one of the plurality of tables specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is specified. I do. As described above, if the counter value of the fluctuation selection state counter is not 0, a table dedicated to the end of the jackpot is selected. On the other hand, if the counter value of the variation selection state counter is 0, the table corresponding to the state of the time reduction state flag is selected.

  After the process of S501 is completed, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 (S502), and the variation pattern counter CS1 is read based on the read value of the variation type counter CS1 and the table selected in the process of S501. The mode is selected (S503). Then, a variation pattern command based on the mode of the selected variation pattern is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S504), and the process ends. The fluctuation pattern command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first entrance 64, and when there is a start win. This is a process for executing a hold process of the values indicated by the various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S601). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is retained in the special symbol N) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  If there is no winning in the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning in the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c must be less than 4. If this is the case (S603: No), this process ends and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S605).

  The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as a voice in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S605, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are updated. Then, the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first one of the empty reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) (S606). In the process of S606, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S606, the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol (whether or not a big hit), the type of stop (the big hit type in the case of a big hit), and its fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S607). Here, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined by one of the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the processing of S606 and the random number value (winning value) stored in the first random number table 202a. It is determined by comparing one. As described above, the random number value which is a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a high probability is stored in the first random number table 202a1 for the high probability, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52". , 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 " There are thirty random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and are "7, 107, 282" stored in the first random number table 202a2 for the low probability. .

  Whether the current state is the special symbol low-probability state or the special symbol high-probability state is determined by referring to the probability change state flag stored in the various setting value storage area 203e. Specifically, if the probable change state flag is on, the special symbol has a high probability state, and if the probable change state flag is off, the special symbol has a low probability state. In the process of S607, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a according to the state of the probability change state flag, and if these values match, the special It is determined that the symbol is a big hit.

  Then, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S606 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, It is determined which of the 13 types of special symbol jackpots (normal jackpot, time-saving jackpot A, time-saving jackpot B, special jackpot A, special jackpot B, probable jackpot A to probable jackpot H). As described above, the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is specified with reference to the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 6B).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is out of the range, based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S606, the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the front and rear out reach. , Or reach other than the front and rear departure, or complete departure. Here, if the probability change state flag is ON, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the processing of S606 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability, Determine the type of stop. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, it is determined that the vehicle is completely out of range. If it is "98, 99", it is determined that the reach is out of order. On the other hand, if the probability change flag 203e is off, the stop type is determined by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, it is determined that the vehicle is completely out of range. If it is "98, 99", it is determined that the reach is out of order.

  Next, a variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The fluctuation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is calculated from a fluctuation pattern selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 and a predicted lottery result and a predicted stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit). Is selected according to In the variation pattern table, for example, “variation (for long time)”, “variation (for short time)”, “variation of normal reach”, “variation of super reach”, “variation of special reach” "Variable patterns for jackpots" are stipulated, and "Various normal reach", "Various super reach", and "Various special reach" are stipulated. , "Common Super Reach", and "Common Special Reach". Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected in accordance with the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

  If the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (the big hit type in the case of a big hit), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S607, then the predicted success or failure of the lottery, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S608), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 13).

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S701). As for the hit during the normal symbol (second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is performed. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S701: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (S704). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 0 (S704: S704). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S708). Specifically, if the value of the time saving state counter stored in the various setting value storage area 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the probable change state flag is ON, it is determined that the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is present. .

  In the processing of S708, when it is determined that the normal symbol is reduced in time (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S709). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be hard to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (ie, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent a ball that is going to win the specific winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64, the first entrance 64 can be prevented from entering the ball during the special jackpot. Many balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the processing of S709, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, so it is acquired in the processing of S707. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 6C).

  In the process of S708, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol) (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S707 is Based on the random number table per common symbol for probabilities, a lottery result is determined as to whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 6C).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S710 or S711 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S712). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “○” is lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S714). If it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S714: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is the special symbol jackpot. Is determined (S715). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off In addition, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the processing of S715, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64 is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two (S716), and the process proceeds to S719. In the process of S714, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol) (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the open period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S712, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary design (S712: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S719). If it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S719: Yes), the variable display of the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, it is the normal state of the ordinary symbol) (S719: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( S721), and terminates this processing. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the release period of the first entrance 64 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). In addition, the fluctuation time here is a time set beforehand by the processing of S720 or the processing of S721 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S722, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S713, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighting). Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the end, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S713 or S718.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S724). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is set (S725), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started by the processing of S725, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next. Is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 13), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the second entrance 67, and when a ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the second hit random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is acquired (S802). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S803: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S805), and the process ends. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S901). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not, it is not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off is not completed normally, the process also shifts to S1012 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S912 in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1114 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S1013, S1014).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1013, S1014) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal, S1007: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1010, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1101). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 13). Send a prize ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the reserved ball number set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 14) and the start winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. The winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103). A jackpot control process for opening or closing a specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). Here, the jackpot state of the special symbol, specifically, it is determined that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern effect to become a jackpot, after the start of the jackpot is set, the end of the set jackpot Indicates the period until setting. In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20). The opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S405 of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 16) or the process of S504 of the out-of-position setting process (see FIG. 17), the variation pattern is set. Is started in the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set by the process of S405 of the big hit setting process (see FIG. 16) or the process of S504 of the out-of-position setting process (see FIG. 17). Is completed, the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the process of S404 of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 16) or the step S503 of the loss setting process (see FIG. 17) is completed. The stop symbol (the first symbol) is stopped (lighted) on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of (1).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S723 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the process is executed in the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S713 or the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1109). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1109: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1102 (S1111).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1108, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 22 has been executed, the processing at S1112 and thereafter when the power is turned off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to game state changes performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. It can be started from the processing of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S1001). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1101. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). The jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 24). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or specific prize winning is performed. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol is being hit (S1201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of S1201, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1201: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is during the special symbol big hit (1201: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1202). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1202: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1203), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1204). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio lamp in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1201, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1201: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or 0.5 seconds) elapses after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or when the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened. When a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) are won after the ball is opened, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1205, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1206), and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1205: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to end the big hit (S1207).

  In the process of S1207, if it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (S1207: Yes), the set value corresponding to the game state after the end of the jackpot is set and the set value for the jackpot is reset. Is executed (S1208), the game state after the end of the jackpot is set, and this process ends. Although details will be described later, in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 26), the jackpot flag is initialized ("00H" is set) together with other set values during the jackpot. Therefore, even when the power of the gaming machine is suddenly turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, it is possible to suppress that only the big hit flag is turned off and the other set values are kept at the setting of the big hit.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the final round of the jackpot, an ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the jackpot is set after the closing condition of the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a is satisfied. You. In the process of S1205, when it is determined that the set ending effect end timing (the effect time set for executing the ending effect has elapsed), it is determined that the big hit end timing has been reached.

  Note that the jackpot end timing is not necessarily limited to the end timing of the ending effect. For example, in the last round of the jackpot, when the closing condition of the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a is satisfied, it may be configured that it is the jackpot ending timing and the process may shift to the jackpot ending processing (S1208). .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28, the jackpot end process (S1208) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 25) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. As described above, the jackpot ending process (S1208) is a process for setting the set value corresponding to the gaming state after the end of the jackpot and resetting the set value for the jackpot.

  In the big hit end processing (S1208), first, the state setting table 202f is read from the ROM 202 (S1301). Here, “read” means that the upper byte (1AH) and the lower byte (D4H) of the head address (1AD4H) of the state setting table 202f are used as address data as a pair of general-purpose registers (for example, general-purpose registers). 210b1 and the general-purpose register 210b2).

  Next, in the game result set value acquisition processing (see FIG. 17) executed before the current big hit is started, the game result set value is previously stored in the offset value storage area of the various set value storage area 203e (see FIG. 11). The offset value is stored in the accumulator 210a. Since the upper byte (F0H) of the address of the various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 11) is a value stored as fixed value data in the address holding register 210f, the offset value is read using a 1-byte read instruction. be able to. That is, the lower byte (95H) of the address of the offset value storage area is specified as a read source (transfer source) and the accumulator 210a is specified as a setting destination. The stored offset value is read and transferred to the accumulator 210a that is the setting destination.

  By using the one-byte read instruction, the upper byte (F0H) of the address of the offset value storage area does not need to be described in the control program, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Next, a calculation process of multiplying the offset value stored in the accumulator 210a by 4 is performed (S1303). This value of 4 is the number of data types defined in the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8) as the setting value after the end of the big hit. That is, four kinds of set values of the special symbol lottery state, the ordinary symbol state, the number of times saved, and the number of times of switching the variation pattern selection mode are defined in the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8).

  As shown in parentheses in FIG. 8, the state setting table 202f includes, from the side with the smallest address value, the lottery state of the special symbol corresponding to the offset value 00H, the state of the ordinary symbol, the number of times saved, and the number of times of switching the variation pattern selection mode. , A special symbol lottery state corresponding to the offset 01H, a normal symbol state, the number of times saved, the number of times of changing the variation pattern selection mode,..., A special symbol lottery state corresponding to the offset 07H, a normal symbol state, the number of times reduced, The data is stored in the order of the variation pattern selection mode switching number. That is, each time the address value is increased by four, the set value corresponding to the offset value which is increased by one is stored. Therefore, the value obtained by multiplying the offset value by 4 is the difference (offset) between the start address of the state setting table 202f and the storage address of the data corresponding to the current offset value. In the process of S1303, an address difference (offset) with respect to the head address of the state setting table 202f is obtained.

  When the processing of S1303 is completed, the difference between the address value set in the pair of general-purpose registers (for example, the general-purpose register 210b1 and the general-purpose register 210b2) in the processing of S1301 with respect to the start address of the state setting table 202f calculated in the processing of S1302. (Offset) is added, and the address after the addition is set as the address of the data transfer source (read source) (S1304).

  Next, an address of the various setting value storage area 203e where the probable change state flag is stored is set as a setting destination address (S1305). Is transferred (S1306).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not all the four types of data specified in the state setting table 202f have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1307). If it is determined that the address exists (S1307: No), 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address, the data specified in the address after the addition is read (S1308), and 1 is added to the set destination address. The data read in the process of S1308 is stored in the address after the addition (S1309). Then, the process returns to S1307, and it is determined again whether all four types of data specified in the state setting table 202f have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1307). That is, the processing of S1307 to S1309 is repeatedly performed until all four types of data specified in the state setting table 202f are transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1307, when it is determined that all the four types of data specified in the state setting table 202f have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1307: Yes), the setting is made in the various setting value storage areas 203e. A state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the performed state is set (S1310), processing for clearing the set value of the jackpot is executed (S1311-S1312), and this processing ends.

  In the process of clearing the jackpot setting value, the start address of the jackpot end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) of the ROM 202 is set as the data transfer source (read source) address (S1311), A data setting process for resetting the data set to perform the control of (1) is executed (S1312), and 0 is set to the address where the setting value of the big hit is set in the various setting value storage area 203e. A zero setting process for initialization is executed (S1313).

  Next, the data setting process (S1312) performed in the big hit end process (see FIG. 26) will be described with reference to FIG. This data setting process (S1312) is a process for resetting the data set for performing the control during the big hit.

  In this data setting process (S1312), first, address data specified in a transfer source (read source) address is read, and an address indicated by the address data is set as a setting destination address (S1401). Here, the transfer source (reading source) address is set to the top address of the big hit end time setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) in the process of S1311 of the big hit end process (see FIG. 26). Further, as shown in FIG. 9A, the start address of the jackpot end setting table 202g stores address data indicating the gaming state setting area in the various setting value storage areas 203e. An address indicating the setting area is set as a setting destination address.

  Next, in the processing of S1401, it is determined whether or not the data read from the jackpot end setting table 202g is “00H” (S1402). If the determination result is “00H” (S1402: Yes), this processing is performed. And the process proceeds to the zero setting process (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the data read from the jackpot end setting table 202g is data other than “00H” (S1402: No), 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address, and The address after the addition is set as a new transfer source (read source) address (S1403).

  Next, the data of the set value stored in the transfer source address is read and stored in the set destination address (S1404). This setting destination address is the address of the various setting value storage area 202e set in the processing of S1401. When the data storage is completed, 1 is added to the transfer source address again, the new transfer source address is set (S1405), and the process returns to S1401. Then, in the process of S1402, the processes of S1401 to S1405 are repeated until 00H is read as the address data. Since it indicates that the reset process has been completed, the process ends.

  Subsequently, the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 after the data setting process (S1312) ends will be described with reference to FIG. The zero setting process (see FIG. 28) is a process of initializing the various setting value storage area 203e by overwriting the various setting values set for performing the big hit control with 0.

  In the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), first, 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address to set a new transfer source (read source) address (S1501). Note that the address set as the transfer source (reading source) address before executing the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) is the end address of the jackpot end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A). The big hit end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B) used in this process is defined in the ROM 202 after the address following the last address of the big hit end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A). ing. Therefore, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), 1 is added to the setting destination address at the beginning of the process, and the setting destination address is changed from the end of the big hit end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) to the big hit. The process is shifted to the beginning of the end-time clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot used in the present process (zero setting process) follows the end address of the jackpot end setting table 202g referred to in the data setting process (see FIG. 27). An end-time clear table 202h is defined. For this reason, by adopting a configuration in which this processing (zero setting processing) is executed following the data setting processing (see FIG. 27), in this processing, the transfer source address is determined again from the ROM 202 at the start of the processing and set. The transfer source address can be specified simply by adding 1 to the immediately preceding transfer source address without the need to perform the transfer again. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

  For example, at the end of the jackpot, if the data to be set in each address of the various setting value storage area 203e is all "00H", the data setting process (see FIG. 27) is omitted and the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) ) May be executed. In this case, at the start of the zero setting process, it is necessary to determine the transfer source address of the data, set the address immediately before the transfer source address as the transfer source address, and then shift to the process of S1501. In the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the process of S1501, a process of adding 1 to the transfer source address and setting it as a new transfer source address is executed. This is because an address shifted by one from the set address is set as the transfer source address.

  Next, in the big hit end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B), the address data stored in the address set as the transfer source (read source) address is read, and is indicated by the read address data. The address of the RAM 203 is set as a setting destination address (S1502).

  After the process of S1502, in the process of S1502, it is determined whether or not the data read from the transfer source (read source) address is “00H” (S1503), and the read data is determined to be “00H”. If the processing has been performed (S1503: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read data is not “00H” (S1503: No), “00H” is overwritten on the address of the RAM 203 set as the setting destination address (S1504), and the process returns to S1501.

  Thereafter, the processing of S1501 to S1504 is repeated until “00H” is read from the big hit end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B). In the big hit end clearing table 202h (see FIG. 9B), "00H" is stored only in the last address, and "00H" is not stored in the addresses other than the last. Until “00H” is stored in all the addresses corresponding to the address data defined in the above, the processing of S1501 to S1504 is repeated.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), the number of times of setting “00H” as data in the various setting value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203 is described in the control program. Instead of terminating the process when it is determined that the data setting for the set number of times has been completed, “00H” is read out as data from the big hit end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B). It is configured to terminate the process when it is determined that it has occurred.

  If the number of set values is described in the control program, the control program designer newly counts the number of set values each time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as diversion of the program to another model. It becomes necessary to rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, it takes time and effort to count the set values, and if the designer makes a mistake, the incorrect number of repetitions is specified in the control program, so that the setting at the end of the jackpot is completed normally. And the pachinko machine 10 may malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is only necessary to define “00H” as data at the end of the big hit end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B). Sometimes the possibility that the designer makes a mistake can be reduced. Therefore, the setting of the data at the end of the big hit can be executed more reliably based on the control program, and the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  Note that the end condition of the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) is that “00H” is read as data because the lower byte of the address in the various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 11) is used. Is an area where the setting value relating to the firing of the ball is stored, and an address whose setting value is not changed before and after the end of the jackpot (initialization is required at the end of the jackpot) And not the address). Since the address does not need to be initialized at the end of the jackpot, it is not necessary to define it as an initialization target address in the jackpot end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B), and the jackpot end clear table 202h ( There is no risk of appearing other than at the end of FIG. 9 (b). Therefore, it is possible to suppress that “00H” is read as the data before the initialization of all the setting values is completed, and the processing is ended.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 29, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1601). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, a so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1716 (see FIG. 30). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S1602). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1713 in FIG. 30), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1716. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1716 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1602: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure and the power-off processing in S1716. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1603).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1606. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to S1604, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process proceeds to S1608.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1604. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1716 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the process proceeds to S1608.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1602: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1716, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1604 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1604, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1604). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1606). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1607), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S1608, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1608). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S1716 (see S1715 in FIG. 30). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1716 is performed, the process of S1608 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1716 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1609), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1611), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason that the process of step S1608 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of steps S1604 to S1606 is followed by the process of step S1608. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), the process skips S1609, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1610, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1610), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1611), and shifts to the main processing.

  It should be noted that the reason why the clearing process of S1609 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S1604 to the process of S1608 via the process of S1606, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1604. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset and the start-up process is started, the control of the sound lamp control device 113 is continued by storing the data in the work area of the RAM 223 without clearing the data. Because you can.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S1701 was executed (S1701). If not (S1701: No), the process proceeds to S1711 without performing the processes of S1702 to S1710. In the processing of S1701, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processing in S1702 to S1710 is mainly for display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1711 and the variable display setting process in S1712 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1711 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1712 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1701 (S1701: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1703 to S1712 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1702). ). Next, the output mode of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1708 described later (S1703), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1704). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1705 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1705, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1706). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1707). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, and the frame button 22 is pressed during the reach effect to display the expectation of the jackpot. The effect may be changed to an effect that can be held, or the frame button 22 may be a determination button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1707 is omitted.

  Upon completion of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing, a lamp editing processing is executed (S1708), and then a sound editing / output processing is executed (S1709). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing in S1709, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1710), and the flow shifts to the processing in S1711. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1708 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1709 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1711, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1711). Details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1711). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the variable display setting process (S1712) ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1713). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1713 (S1713: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1715), and the power-off processing is executed (S1716). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S1717). In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1714), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1714: No), the process returns to S1701, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1714: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1711). This command determination process (S1711) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . In addition, in this process, when receiving the number-of-retained-balls command from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous announcement effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S1801). When the variation pattern command is received (S1801: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1802), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1803). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 32) is executed. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1801: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1804). When the stop type command is received (S1804: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1805), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1806). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1804: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1807). Then, when the reserved ball count command is received (S1807: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball count command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol) Is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1808). In the processing of S1808, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the end of the process in S1808, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 or when a special symbol is drawn. Every time is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S1808 to the special symbol retaining ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the detection of the start winning or the special At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1808 is executed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, the display control device 114 displays the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls on the third symbol display device 81.

In the processing of S1807, when the command of the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1807: No), it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1809). When the winning information command is received (S1809: Yes), various information (acceptance, stop type, change pattern) is extracted from the received winning information command as winning information (S1809). After the processing of S1809 is completed, the winning information (whether or not, the type of stop, the variation pattern) extracted in the processing of S1809 is then stored in the first of the free areas (first to fourth areas) of the winning information storage area 223a. Stored in the area (S1810),
Return to main processing.

  If the winning information command has not been received in the process of S1809 (S1809: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1812). When the round number command is received (S1812: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S1813), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number (S1813). S1814), this process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1812, if the round number command has not been received (S1812: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed ( S1819), and returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, a processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1712). This variable display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to execute a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1901). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1906. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1902), and then, in the process of S1803 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905). In the process of S1905, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the process of S1906.

  In the processing of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1906: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1907), and then, in the process of S1806 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31), The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1908).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1909), and the display control device is set based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notifying the display control unit 114 is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1910), and the process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 determines that the "special symbol jackpot", the fluctuating effect corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" and after the fluctuating effect The set value of the jackpot state (special game state) is set in various set value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203, and the offset value for selecting the state after the end of the jackpot from the state setting table 202f is stored in the RAM 203. It is configured. When the jackpot ends, the set value corresponding to the state after the jackpot is read out from the state setting table 202f based on the offset value stored in the RAM 203 in advance, and set in the various set value storage areas 203e. It is configured to be.

  The gaming state after the jackpot is determined based on a random number value acquired when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning). However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming state is acquired. The obtained random number value is held until the end timing of the jackpot, instead of being used to specify the gaming state after the jackpot, the obtained random number value is converted and held in the form of an offset value and held. The game state after the end of the jackpot is set based on the offset value.

  Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a random number value which becomes a jackpot of a special symbol to be obtained illegally from the outside, so that the timing at which the random number value which becomes a jackpot appears is analyzed, and a fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing is performed. Can be suppressed. Specifically, by setting the analyzed timing on a so-called hanging substrate, acquiring a random number at a timing when a random number value to be a big hit appears, and suppressing a fraudulent act of performing control so as to judge the success or failure of the big hit. Can be.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values to be set in the various setting value storage area 203e as a game state after the end of the big hit (a lottery state of a special symbol, a state of a normal symbol, a number of working hours, a variation pattern selection table). The number of times of switching is not specified and held before the start of the jackpot game, but only an offset value indicating a storage position of various setting values in the state setting table 202f is held. Therefore, it is sufficient that the RAM 203 only has a storage area for one byte of the offset value storage area. Therefore, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a zero setting process (see FIG. 28), which is a process for initializing the set value for the big hit at the end timing of the big hit, is executed. In this zero setting process (see FIG. 28), “00H” is sequentially set as data at a plurality of addresses specified in the big hit end clear table 202h of the ROM 202. That is, only the setting destination address for initializing the setting is defined in the big hit end clear table 202h, and the control of writing “00H” is described on the control program side.

  When the big hit end clear table 202h is configured to define the setting destination addresses of the various setting value storage areas 203e and the setting data (ie, 00H) for setting the setting destination addresses, the big hit end clear table There is a problem that the data amount of 202h increases. On the other hand, if only the setting destination address is defined in the big hit end clear table 202h as in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the data amount of the big hit end clear table 202h can be reduced. The capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), the number of times of setting data in the various setting value storage areas 203e is described in the control program, and the number of times of setting is described. Instead of terminating the process when it is determined that the data setting has been completed, the process is terminated when it is determined that "00H" has been read out as data from the big hit end clear table 202h. are doing.

  If the number of set values is described in the control program, the control program designer newly counts the number of set values each time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as diversion of the program to another model. It becomes necessary to rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, it takes time and effort to count the set values, and if the designer makes a mistake, the incorrect number of repetitions is specified in the control program, so that the setting at the end of the jackpot is completed normally. And the pachinko machine 10 may malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is only necessary to define “00H” as data at the end of the jackpot end setting table 202g and the jackpot end clearing table 202h, so that when designing the control program, The possibility that a designer makes a mistake can be reduced. Therefore, the setting of the data at the end of the big hit can be executed more reliably based on the control program, and the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the data setting process (see FIG. 27) and the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), the big hit end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) and the big hit end clear table 202h. Although the respective processes are terminated when “00H” is read as data from (see FIG. 9B), the termination condition of each process is not limited to this. For example, when “FFH” is read as data from the jackpot end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) or the jackpot end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B), each process ends. You may.

  Further, the conditions for terminating the data setting process (see FIG. 27) and the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) may be different. For example, when "00H" is read as data from the big hit end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A), the data setting process (see FIG. 27) ends, and the big hit end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9). The configuration may be such that the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) is terminated when “FFH” is read as data from (b).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a process of continuing the control specified in the ROM 202 until “00H” is read is provided only in the jackpot ending process (FIG. 26). It is not limited. For example, the same processing may be performed when setting at the start of fluctuation or when setting at the end of fluctuation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the big hit setting process (see FIG. 16), in addition to the setting of the fluctuation pattern, the setting of the big hit, the offset value, and the like are read from the game result setting table 202e. Although the process of transferring the data to the various setting value storage area 203e is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the big hit setting process (see FIG. 16), only the setting of the variation pattern may be performed, and a setting value or an offset value indicating the setting of the big hit may be set at the start of the big hit.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, two processes of a data setting process (see FIG. 27) and a zero setting process (see FIG. 28) are provided as processes for resetting the jackpot setting. The set value of a predetermined address in the set value storage area 203e is reset.

  More specifically, the data setting process (see FIG. 27) performed in the big hit end process (see FIG. 26) causes the big hit end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9 (a)) defined in the ROM 202 to be stored. Based on this, the setting of the game state is reset, and further, the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) executed following the data setting process (see FIG. 27) performs the big hit end clear table 202h ( Based on FIG. 9B), the set value of the address in the RAM 203 where the setting of the jackpot is set is cleared.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a jackpot end setting / clear table 202i including the information defined in the jackpot end setting table 202g and the information defined in the jackpot end clear table 202h is provided. Based on the information defined in the big hit end setting / clear table 202i, the big hit setting is reset by the data setting process (see FIG. 27).

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that the jackpot end setting table 202g provided in the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and A big hit end setting / clear table 202i is provided instead of the big hit end clear table 202h. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment stores a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, a game result setting A table 202e and a state setting table 202f are provided. The ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is provided with a jackpot end setting / clear table 202i in addition to the above. That is, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment is provided with a big hit end setting / clear table 202i instead of the big hit end setting table 202g and the big hit end clear table 202h provided in the first embodiment. . The other configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The big hit end setting / clear table 202i is a table which is referred to for resetting the set value of the address where the big hit setting in the various set value storage areas 203e is set at the big hit end timing. The address is defined in the range of “1202H” to “121EH”. Details of the big hit end setting / clear table 202i will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 33 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of data specified in the big hit end setting / clear table 202i. As shown in FIG. 33 (b), the big hit end setting / clearing table 202i includes, in the various setting value storage areas 203e, address data indicating an address (setting destination) where the setting value needs to be reset, The setting contents to be set at the address (setting destination) are alternately defined. As the addresses that need to be reset, for example, an address (F030H) in which the setting of the maximum number of rounds is stored, an address of the winning number counter (F031H), and the like are defined.

  As described above, the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i includes data specified in the jackpot end setting table 202g and data specified in the jackpot end clear table 202h in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. And both are stipulated. Here, only the information indicating the address of the setting destination is defined in the big hit end clear table 202h, and the data “00H” stored in the address of the setting destination is not specified in the table, and the control program side The control process for setting “00H” is described. On the other hand, the big hit end setting / clear table 202i has a configuration in which the setting values to be set in all the setting destination addresses are defined in the table. That is, all data have the same data configuration as the jackpot end setting table 202g in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, two types of tables having different data structures (a jackpot end setting table 202g in which both the setting destination address data and the data to be set in the setting destination) are defined, Since the setting change of the various setting value storage areas 203e has been performed with reference to the big hit end clear table 202h) in which only the previous address data is specified, the data setting processing (see FIG. 27) and the zero setting are performed, respectively. It is necessary to provide two types of control processing, ie, processing (see FIG. 28), and perform the processing separately. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, only one type of the big hit end setting / clear table 202i is provided, and the data arrangement is the same as that of the big hit end setting table 202g. Therefore, if only one type of the data setting process (see FIG. 27) is prepared as the control process, all the settings relating to the big hit can be reset at the end of the big hit.

<Regarding the control processing in the second embodiment>
Hereinafter, it will be described with reference to FIG. 27 again that in the second embodiment, if only the data setting process (see FIG. 27) is provided, all the settings relating to the jackpot can be reset. As described above, FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a data setting process that is a process for resetting the setting value related to the jackpot.

  In the data setting process (see FIG. 27), first, address data specified in the transfer source address is read, and an address indicated by the read address data is set as a setting destination address (S1401). Here, in the first embodiment, before the data setting process is started, the transfer source (reading source) address is set to the head address of the jackpot end setting table 202g (S1311 in FIG. 26). In the second embodiment, instead of this, the start address (1202H) of the big hit end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B) is set as the transfer source (read source) address. Therefore, in the processing of S1401 performed after the start of the data setting processing (see FIG. 27), the address of the gaming state setting area defined in the start address of the big hit end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33 (b)). (F035H) is set to the setting destination address.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the data read as the setting destination address is “00H” (S1402). If it is determined that the data is “00H” (S1402: Yes), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read data is not “00H” (S1402: No), 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address and set as a new transfer source (read source) address (S1403). ).

  In the processing of S1402, which is performed first after the start of the data setting processing (see FIG. 27), the address (F035H) of the game state setting area is read as the setting destination address, so that the read data is not “00H”. It is determined (S1402: No), and the address (1203H) obtained by adding 1 to the start address (1202H) of the big hit end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B) is set as the transfer source address (S1403). .

  Thereafter, the setting value data stored in the transfer source address is set as the set destination address (S1404), 1 is added to the transfer source address, and the new transfer source address is set (S1405), and the process returns to S1401. In the process of S1404 performed first after the start of the data setting process (see FIG. 27), since the address “1203H” is set as the transfer source address, the reset data stored in the transfer source address is read. Then, the address (F035H) of the game state setting area is set (S1404), 1 is added to the transfer source address "1203H", and the transfer source address is set to "1204H" (S1405). Return.

  Thereafter, the setting destination address specified in the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B) is replaced with the setting specified in the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B). The process of writing the contents is repeated. The setting destination address specified in the big hit end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B) sets the test signal setting addresses “F01DH” and “F01EH” and the maximum number of rounds. Since addresses other than "00H", such as "F030H", are specified, it is determined that "00H" has been read out by the processing of S1402 before resetting all the setting destinations. The termination of the setting process (see FIG. 27) can be suppressed. When all the data is set, the transfer destination (reading source) address is set to “00H” defined at the end of the big hit end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B). The data setting process (see FIG. 27) is completed by the process of S1402.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a condition for terminating the data setting process (see FIG. 27), the number of times of setting data in the various setting value storage areas 203e is described in the control program, and Instead of terminating the process when it is determined that the data setting for the number of times has been completed, the process ends when it is determined that "00H" has been read out as data from the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i. It is configured to be.

  If the number of set values is described in the control program, the control program designer newly counts the number of set values each time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as diversion of the program to another model. It becomes necessary to rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, it takes time and effort to count the set values, and if the designer makes a mistake, the incorrect number of repetitions is specified in the control program, so that the setting at the end of the jackpot is completed normally. And the pachinko machine 10 may malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since it is only necessary to define “00H” as data at the end of the big hit end setting / clear table 202i, the control program The possibility that the designer makes a mistake at the time of designing can be reduced. Therefore, the setting of the data at the end of the big hit can be executed more reliably based on the control program, and the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, only one type of the big hit end setting / clear table 202i is provided, and the big hit setting is reset by referring to the single table. Therefore, if only one type of the data setting process (see FIG. 27) is prepared as the control process, all the settings relating to the jackpot can be reset at the end of the jackpot, so that the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment can be reset. Thus, the program capacity can be reduced as compared with the above.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the data setting process (see FIG. 27), when “00H” is read as data from the big hit end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33 (b)), Although the processing is configured to end, the end condition of the data setting processing (see FIG. 27) is not limited to this. For example, the process may be terminated when "FFH" is read as data from the setting / clearing table 202i at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 33B).

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) for initializing the set value for performing the control of the jackpot, the clearing table at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 9B) is used. In this configuration, “00H” is set to all the setting destination addresses. For this reason, if there is a set value having an initial value other than “00H”, it cannot be defined in the big hit end clear table (see FIG. 9B), and another process is provided to provide an initial value. Values had to be set separately.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, at the end of the jackpot, a plurality of set values having different initial values can be initialized by one process. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, among the set values initialized based on the big hit end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B), the initial values of the set values related to the test signal are initialized. The value is configured to be “FFH”. On the other hand, the set value of the maximum number of rounds and the initial value of the winning number counter and the like are configured to be "00H", similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is replaced with the big hit end clear table 202h provided in the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10. That is, a big hit end initial value setting table 202j is provided. Further, a partial process included in the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
First, an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment stores a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, a game result setting A table 202e, a state setting table 202f, and a jackpot end setting table 202g are provided. The ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is provided with a jackpot end time initial value setting table 202j in addition to the above. That is, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment is provided with a jackpot end time initial value setting table 202j instead of the big hit end clear table 202h provided in the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the jackpot end time initial value setting table 202j will be described with reference to FIG. The big hit end initial value setting table 202j is a table stored in the addresses “1205H” to “1212H” of the ROM 202, and the addresses of the various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 11) are defined in each address. Have been. Note that, in the jackpot ending initial value setting table 202j, data "00H" is stored in the addresses "1207H" and "1213H" of the ROM 202 as data. The “00H” data is not data for designating an address, but data for ending the repetitive processing for setting an initial value.

  Although details will be described later, in the zero setting process 2 (see FIG. 36), which is one of the jackpot end processes, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 arranges the addresses of the ROM 202 from the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j in the ROM 202. The stored data is read, and either “00H” or “FFH” (initial value data) is set as the set value in the address indicated by the read stored data (address data).

  Whether to set “00H” or “FFH” as the initial value is determined by the order of data. Specifically, the address of the various setting value storage area 203e indicated by the data stored at the address before the address "1207H" in which "00H" is defined as the data is set to "FFH" as the initial value. Set. On the other hand, "00H" is set as an initial value in the address of the various setting value storage area 203e indicated by data stored at an address subsequent to the address "1207H" in which "00H" is defined as data.

<Control Process in Third Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. First, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. In the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 35), similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a set value for determining a state after the jackpot is ended is set in the various set value storage areas 203e, and control relating to the jackpot is performed. This is a process executed to reset a set value set to be performed.

  In the big hit end processing (see FIG. 35), in each processing of S1301 to S1312, the same processing as each of the big hit end processing of S1301 to S1312 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 26) is executed. Then, in the big hit end processing (see FIG. 35) in the third embodiment, when the processing of S1312 is completed, the big hit end processing (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment is replaced with the zero setting processing (S1313), and is set to zero. Processing 2 (S1321) is executed. This zero setting process 2 (S1321) is a process for resetting the set values set in the various set value storage areas 203e to the initial values in order to control the big hit.

  Here, the details of the zero setting process 2 (S1321) will be described with reference to FIG. In the zero setting process 2 (S1321), in each of the processes of S1501 to S1503, the same processes as the respective processes of S1501 to S1503 of the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment are executed. The description is omitted.

  If it is determined in step S1502 that the address data read from the transfer source (read source) address is not “00H” (S1503: No), the various setting value storage areas designated as the setting destination addresses in step S1502 “FFH” is set as the initial value in the address of 203e (S1511), and the process returns to S1501. On the other hand, if it is determined that the address data read in the process of S1502 is “00H” (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1512. That is, the processing of S1501 to S1503 and S1511 is repeated until “00H” is read as data from the initial value setting table 202j at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 34B).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the initial value of the set value of the test signal is “FFH”. On the other hand, the initial value of the set value other than the set value of the test signal (the set value of the maximum number of rounds, the value of the winning number counter, and the like) is “00H”. In order to collectively set these different initial values, the address for setting the test signal is defined in order from the head address of the jackpot ending initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34B). Until the data "00H" is read from the jackpot ending initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34 (b)), the jackpot ending initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34 (b)) is read. The process of setting "FFH" as an initial value at the data setting position (address) is looped, and when "00H" is read, the loop is terminated and the process proceeds to S1512.

  Next, in the process of S1512, 1 is added to the address of the jackpot ending initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34B) set as the transfer source (reading source) (S1512), and the address after the addition is added. The address data stored in the RAM 203 is read out and set as a setting destination address for setting an initial value (S1513).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the address data read in the process of S1513 is “00H” (S1514). If it is determined that the read data is “00H”, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read data is not “00H” (S1514: No), “00H” is set to the address set as the setting destination (S1515), and the process returns to S1512 again. That is, as long as “00H” is not read as data from the jackpot ending initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34B), the jackpot ending initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34B). "00H" is set as an initial value in order in the address where the data is stored. When “00H” is read as data from the initial value setting table 202j at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 34B), it means that initial values have been set for all setting destinations. The process ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as setting items to be initialized at the end of the big hit, in addition to the setting value having the initial value “00H”, the setting value having the initial value “FFH” Is also configured so that initialization can be performed in one process. Therefore, the degree of freedom in setting the initial value of each set value can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the initial value is set to “00H” and the initial value is set to “FFH”. However, the initial value of each setting item is not limited to these values. , "0FH" may be set as an initial value, and "01H" may be set as an initial value.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the zero setting process 2 (see FIG. 36), when “00H” is read as data from the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34 (b)), It is configured to exit the loop processing of sequentially setting “FFH” as an initial value to each setting destination address specified in the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34B). Conditions for exiting the process are not limited to this. The data that can be used as a condition for exiting the loop processing may be any data that corresponds to the lower byte of the address where the setting is not likely to be changed when the gaming state is changed. For example, in the various setting value storage areas 203e, the addresses “F09CH” to “F0FFH” are unused work areas as described above. Therefore, since the set value is not rewritten due to a change in the game state or the like, the lower byte (for example, “AAH” or “BBH”) of any of these addresses may be used as the termination condition.

  Similarly, the data setting process in the first and second embodiments (see FIG. 27), the zero setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 28), and the zero setting process 2 in the third embodiment The condition for ending (see FIG. 36) is not limited to the case where “00H” is read as data. For example, the process is ended when “AAH” or “BBH” is read. May be configured.

  Further, the initial values set in the zero setting process 2 (see FIG. 36) in the third embodiment are not limited to two types, and an arbitrary number of initial values may be provided.

  In addition, the data setting process in the first and second embodiments (see FIG. 27), the zero setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 28), and the zero setting process 2 in the third embodiment (FIG. 36) Are executed to initialize the jackpot setting when the jackpot ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case where the number of times of saving time of the ordinary symbol becomes 0 and the state shifts to the normal state of the ordinary symbol, any of these processes may be used to delete the setting of the time saving state of the ordinary symbol.

  Further, the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the data setting process (see FIG. 27), the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) in the second embodiment, and the zero setting process in the third embodiment 2 (see FIG. 36) is configured such that reading of one data and setting of one data are alternately performed. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of data are collectively read and the collectively read data is set collectively.

  For example, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) of the first embodiment, the address data stored in the transfer source address is read and set as the set destination address (see S1502 in FIG. 28). If the data is other than “00H” (S1503: No), the process may return to S1501 without going to S1504.

  Specifically, each time a transfer source address is newly set by the processing of S1501, the address data stored in the transfer source address is stored in different general-purpose registers (general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2). By doing so, it is set to the setting destination address. For example, first, the data stored at the address set as the transfer source address by the process of S1501 is stored in the general-purpose register 210b1, and then stored at the address newly set as the transfer source address by the process of S1501 performed next. The stored data may be stored in, for example, the general-purpose register 210b2. Thereafter, each time the transfer source address is updated by the process of S1501, the transfer source address may be sequentially stored in the general-purpose register 210c1, the general-purpose register 210c2, or the like.

  If it is determined in step S1503 that the read address data is “00H”, the process ends after overwriting “00H” as data on all addresses set as the setting destination addresses. It may be configured as follows.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, six types of general-purpose registers 210b1, 210b2, 210c1, 210c2, 210d1, and 210d2 are provided as general-purpose registers for temporarily storing data. Can be set at a maximum of six types, but the number of general-purpose registers may be increased so that more setting destination addresses can be set.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments, the setting of the fluctuation pattern, the setting during the big hit, and the setting when the big hit is ended when the big hit is won are performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Was not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the pachinko machines 10 of the first to third embodiments, the game result setting table 202e, the state setting table 202f, and the like are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments, the various setting value storage areas 203e are provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, and a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and is not provided with a handle for launching a ball. Things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be described.

<Feature A group> (The process ends when 00H is read)
Control means for executing a game control according to a predetermined control procedure; storage means for storing control data read by the control means; and control data read by the control means for specifying predetermined data. Control data discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the control data is read out. The control means repeats reading of the control data and control based on the read control data in accordance with the control procedure. When executing the process, the read control process is terminated based on the fact that the read control data is determined to be the specific data by the control data determining unit, and the next process executed according to the control procedure is performed. Gaming machine A1 characterized by shifting to the processing of (1).

  According to the gaming machine A1, the control of the game is executed by the control means in accordance with a predetermined control procedure, the control data read by the control means based on the control procedure is stored in the storage means, and the read control data is stored in the storage means. It is determined by the control data determining means whether or not the data is predetermined specific data. When the control unit executes a read control process of repeatedly reading control data and performing control based on the read control data, it is determined that the read control data is predetermined specific data. Based on the determination by the means, the read control process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process executed according to the control procedure.

  Accordingly, in the read control process, if the specific data is read, the process proceeds to the next process, so that it is not necessary to define how many times the control data read and the control based on the read control data are repeated. . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the control from being performed a different number of times from the number of repetitions to be performed by the readout control process due to a mistake in defining the number of repetitions. Therefore, there is an effect that a malfunction of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1, in the control data, setting data indicating a setting destination for performing a setting related to a game and setting data for setting the setting destination indicated by the setting data are alternately defined. In the read control process, data is read in the order specified in the control data, and the next setting data to be read is set to the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data. A gaming machine A2 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, setting data indicating a setting destination for performing settings related to the game and setting data for setting the setting destination indicated by the setting data are alternately defined in the control data. The data is read by the read control process in the order specified by the control data, and the next setting data to be read is set to the setting destination indicated by the read setting data.

  Accordingly, when reading data, it is not necessary to perform a process of determining which data should be read next among the data specified in the control data, so that the processing load on the control unit can be reduced. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine A2, there is provided state change determining means for determining whether or not to change the gaming state, and the control data is one in which various setting values relating to the gaming state are defined as the setting data. A gaming machine A3 for executing the read control process when the state change determining means determines that the gaming state is to be changed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2. That is, whether or not the game state is changed is determined by the state change determination unit. Various setting values relating to the gaming state are defined in the control data as setting data. When it is determined by the state change determining means that the game state is to be changed, the reading control processing is executed by the control means.

  Thereby, when the game state is changed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a malfunction of the gaming machine without setting the set value to be set.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A3, the specific data is different from any other data specified in the control data.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A1 to A3. That is, since the specific data is different from any other data specified in the control data, the same data as the specific data is not read before the specific data is read from the control data.

  Therefore, since the read control process is repeated until the specific data is read, it is possible to prevent the read control process from being terminated before all the controls to be performed by the read control process are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a malfunction of the gaming machine without executing the control to be executed.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A4, the specific data is defined at the end of the control data.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A4, since the specific data is specified at the end of the control data, control based on all other data specified in the control data is ensured. There is an effect that can be executed.

<Feature B group> (0 is sequentially set to the addresses stored in the table until 00H is read)
According to a predetermined control procedure, a control means for controlling the game, and a storage means for storing a plurality of setting destination data indicating a setting destination where the control means performs a setting related to the game, the control means according to the control procedure A reading process for sequentially reading the setting destination data from the storage means and a setting process for setting a predetermined setting value to a setting destination indicated by the setting destination data read by the reading process. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B1, according to a predetermined control procedure, a plurality of setting destination data indicating a setting destination at which the control means for controlling the game performs a setting relating to the game is stored by the storage means. A reading process for sequentially reading the setting destination data from the storage unit in accordance with the control procedure, and a setting process for setting a predetermined setting value to a setting destination indicated by the setting destination data read by the reading process, respectively, are performed by the control unit. It is repeated.

  Thus, a predetermined setting value can be set by the setting process without storing the setting value for setting the setting destination data read by the reading process in the gaming machine. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of data stored at a predetermined set value can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B1, the control unit performs the setting process based on the read one set destination data every time one set destination data is read by the read process. Gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B1, each time one set destination data is read out by the read process, the control means performs the setting process based on the one set destination data read. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of data read by the reading process and set by the setting process can be minimized.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the setting destination data is defined in the order in which the data is read by the control means.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1 or B2. That is, since the setting destination data is defined in the order in which the data is read by the control means, the processing of determining which data to be read next among the data stored in the storage means at each read processing is determined. There is no need to do. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load on the control means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B3, the control means determines whether or not the setting destination data read by the read processing is predetermined specific data, and the control means reads the setting data by the determination means. When the determined setting data is determined to be predetermined specific data, there is provided an avoiding means for avoiding a process of setting a predetermined setting value to a setting destination indicated by the read setting data. A gaming machine B4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines B1 to B3. That is, the determination means determines whether or not the setting destination data read by the reading process is predetermined specific data. When the determination unit determines that the read setting destination data is the predetermined specific data, the process of setting a predetermined setting value to the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data is avoided. Avoided by means.

  Thus, the read process and the setting process can be repeated until the specific data is read, even if the number of times the read process and the setting process are repeated is not specified in the control program. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the read control process from being terminated before all the controls to be performed by the read control process are executed due to a mistake in defining the number of repetitions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a malfunction of the gaming machine due to the fact that the control to be executed is not executed.

  In the gaming machine B4, the specific data is data different from any of the other setting destination data stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B4. That is, since the specific data is different from any of the other setting destination data stored in the storage unit, the same data as the specific data is not read before the specific data is read from the storage unit.

  Thus, the reading process and the setting process are repeated until the specific data is read, so that it is possible to prevent the process from being completed before all the controls to be performed by the control unit are executed. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a malfunction of the gaming machine without executing the control to be executed.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the specific data is defined at the end of the setting destination data.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4 or B5, since the specific data is defined at the end of the setting data, the control based on all other setting data stored in the storage means. Can be surely executed.

  In the gaming machine B4, the predetermined set value is provided with a first set value and a second set value different from the first set value, and the control means controls the control procedure by the determination means. Until it is initially determined that the setting data read in accordance with the above is the predetermined specific data, the setting data is read and the first setting value is set to the setting destination indicated by the read setting data. After the first determination that the setting data read out according to the control procedure by the determining means is predetermined specific data, the reading of the setting data and the reading thereof are performed. A game machine B7 that repeats the process of setting the second set value to the set destination indicated by the set destination data.

  According to the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B4. That is, the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value are provided as the predetermined set values. Until the setting data read by the determining means in accordance with the control means is first determined to be the predetermined specific data, the setting data is read and the first setting is made to the setting destination indicated by the read setting data. The process of setting the value is repeated by the control means. After it is initially determined that the setting destination data read according to the control procedure is the predetermined specific data, the setting destination data is read, and the second setting value is set to the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data. Is repeated by the control means.

  This eliminates the need to store the first set value and the second set value in association with the setting destination, and thus has the effect of reducing the amount of data stored in the storage unit.

<Feature C group> (Calculate the offset value from the jackpot random number and hold the offset value during the jackpot)
In a gaming machine having storage means for storing information relating to a game, and control means for performing control relating to the game, a game state determination means for determining a game state, and a game state determined by the game state determination means, Game state setting means for setting based on establishment of a condition, wherein the storage means includes setting data for setting a game state by the game state setting means, and data necessary for selecting the setting data. Selection means for storing, from the storage means, identification data corresponding to the game state determined by the game state determination means, and identification data selected by the selection means. Holding means for holding at least until the predetermined condition is satisfied, wherein the game state setting means is held by the holding means Gaming machine C1, characterized in that the setting data corresponding to the identification data are, and sets read from said storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the gaming state is determined by the gaming state determining means, and the setting data for setting the gaming state by the gaming state setting means and the identification data necessary for selecting the setting data are stored. Stored by means. Identification data corresponding to the game state determined by the game state determination means is selected from the storage means by the selection means, and the identification data selected by the selection means is held by the holding means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Setting data corresponding to the identification data held by the holding means is read out from the storage means and set by the gaming state setting means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition.

  Thereby, since the identification data corresponding to the game state determined by the game state determination unit is held by the holding unit, it is possible to prevent the method of determining the game state by the game state determination unit from being acquired from outside. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an improper act of externally controlling the game state determining means to determine a game state that is advantageous to the player.

  In the gaming machine C1, the identification data is smaller in size than the setting data.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the identification data is smaller in size than the setting data, so that the amount of data stored in the holding unit is smaller than when the setting data is held by the holding unit. There is an effect that it can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the storage means stores a plurality of state data for setting a game state from when the game state is determined by the game state determination means to when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Wherein the identification data is stored in the storage unit in association with each of the plurality of state data, and a state selection unit selects and sets one state data from the plurality of state data A gaming machine C3 comprising: means for selecting the identification data corresponding to the first state data selected by the state selecting means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1 or C2. That is, the storage means stores a plurality of state data for setting the game state from when the game state is determined by the game state determination means to when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Identification data is stored in the storage means in association with each of the plurality of state data. One state data is selected from the plurality of state data by the state selection means and set.

  Thus, when the identification data is selected by the selection means, it is only necessary to select the identification data stored in association with the one state data selected and set by the state selection means. There is an effect that the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where data and data are selected independently.

  When the gaming state is determined by the gaming state determining means, the gaming machine C1 includes state setting means for setting a gaming state different from the determined gaming state until the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, when the gaming state is determined by the gaming state determining means, a gaming state different from the determined gaming state is determined by the state setting means by the predetermined condition. Is established until the condition is satisfied, so that the player's interest in the game until the predetermined condition is satisfied can be improved.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C3, acquiring means for acquiring random information based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the random information And a lottery means for performing a lottery, wherein the gaming state determining means, when it is determined by the lottery means to shift to the special gaming state, the gaming state based on the random information acquired by the acquiring means Wherein the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means based on the end of the special gaming state. .

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines C1 to C3. That is, random information is obtained by the obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the random information is determined by the lottery means. Is determined. When it is determined by the lottery means to shift to the special game state, the game state is determined by the game state determination means based on the random information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the end of the special gaming state, the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means.

  As a result, it is not necessary to hold the random information obtained by the obtaining unit until the special game state ends, so that information corresponding to the special game state among the random information is obtained from the outside due to fraud. Can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an illegal act of inputting information corresponding to the special game state from the outside and shifting to the special game state.

<Characteristic D group> (Data readout is performed collectively, and then data is set collectively)
In accordance with a predetermined control procedure, control means for controlling the game, storage means for storing a plurality of setting destination data indicating a setting destination where the control means performs settings related to the game, and setting destination data stored in the storage means A data storage area to be stored, and a determination unit that determines whether the setting destination data read by the control unit is predetermined specific data, and the control unit, according to the control procedure, A read storage process for reading out the set destination data from the storage means and storing the read set destination data in the data storage area for a plurality of set destination data; And a batch setting process of batch setting a predetermined set value to each of the setting destinations indicated by the plurality of setting destination data stored in the In the reading and storing process, the process shifts to the batch setting process based on that the determination unit determines that the read setting destination data is predetermined specific data. Gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, according to a predetermined control procedure, a plurality of setting destination data indicating a setting destination at which the control means for controlling the game makes a setting relating to the game is stored by the storage means, and is stored in the storage means. The setting destination data is stored in the data storage area. The determination means determines whether the setting destination data read by the control means is predetermined specific data. In accordance with the control procedure, read-out processing is repeated from a plurality of setting-destination data to read the setting-destination data from the storage means and store the read setting-destination data in the data storage area; The control means executes a collective setting process of collectively setting a predetermined set value to each of the setting destinations indicated by the plurality of setting destination data stored in the area. In the read storage process, the process shifts to the batch setting process based on the determination that the read setting destination data is the predetermined specific data by the determination unit.

  As a result, when the specific data is read out in the readout storage process, the process shifts to the batch setting process. Therefore, in the readout storage process, it is specified how many times the reading of the setting destination data and the storage in the data storage area are repeated. No need. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control from being performed a different number of times from the number of repetitions to be performed by the reading and storing process due to a mistake in defining the number of repetitions. Therefore, there is an effect that a malfunction of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the specific data is different from any of the other setting destination data stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. That is, since the specific data is different from any other data specified in the control data, the same data as the specific data is not read before the specific data is read from the control data.

  Thus, the read storage process is repeated until the specific data is read, so that it is possible to prevent the read storage process from being terminated before all the controls to be performed by the read storage process are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a malfunction of the gaming machine without executing the control to be executed.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the specific data is stored at the end of the setting destination data.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, since the specific data is defined at the end of the setting destination data, control based on all other setting destination data stored in the storage means is performed. Can be executed reliably.

  The gaming machine Z1 wherein each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is inserted into a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. The requirement for winning (or passing through the winning opening) is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display unit is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball in a starting winning opening is a winning. In such a gaming machine, when the game state is changed, for example, when the game machine transitions to the hit state or when the game state ends, the initial value is set to a plurality of set values corresponding to the changed game state. A predetermined value is set. As a method of setting the initial value, there is a method in which the number of set values is defined in a control program, and the control for setting the initial value is repeated by the number of set values (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2001-276365).
However, in such a gaming machine, if the model is different, the winning state and the state of the state after the winning may be different, so the number of setting values to be set when changing the gaming state varies depending on the model. There is a risk of doing this. Therefore, when applying a control program to another model having a different number of set values, the designer needs to count the number of set values for each model to be applied and redefine the number of repetitions in the control program. Was. For this reason, if an incorrect number of repetitions is specified in the control program due to a mistake of the designer, all initial values cannot be set, and the gaming machine may malfunction after the gaming state is changed. .
The present technical concept has been made to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a malfunction of the gaming machine.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 comprises a control unit for executing a game control according to a predetermined control procedure, a storage unit for storing control data read out by the control unit, Control data determination means for determining whether the control data read by the control means is predetermined specific data, the control means reads the control data according to the control procedure, When performing a read control process, which is a process of repeatedly performing control based on the read control data, based on that the control data determination unit determines that the read control data is the specific data, This ends the read control process and shifts to the next process executed according to the control procedure.
In the gaming machine according to the technical concept 2, in the gaming machine according to the technical concept 1, the control data is set to setting destination data indicating a setting destination for performing a setting related to the game and a setting destination indicated by the setting destination data. Data for setting is alternately specified, and the read control process reads data in the order specified by the control data, and sets the read data to the set destination indicated by the read set data. , For setting the next read data.
The gaming machine according to the third technical concept is the gaming machine according to the second technical concept, further including a state change determination unit configured to determine whether to change a gaming state. The control data includes various setting values related to the gaming state. It is defined as the setting data, and executes the read control process when it is determined that the game state is changed by the state change determination unit.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the control of the game is executed by the control means according to a predetermined control procedure, the control data read by the control means is stored in the storage means, and the read control data is stored in the storage means. It is determined by the control data determining means whether or not the data is predetermined specific data. When the control unit executes a read control process of repeatedly reading control data and performing control based on the read control data, it is determined that the read control data is predetermined specific data. Based on the determination by the means, the read control process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process executed according to the control procedure.
Accordingly, in the read control process, if the specific data is read, the process proceeds to the next process, so that it is not necessary to define how many times the control data read and the control based on the read control data are repeated. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control from being performed a different number of times from the number of repetitions to be performed by the read control process due to a mistake in defining the number of repetitions. Therefore, there is an effect that a malfunction of the gaming machine can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects can be obtained. That is, setting data indicating a setting destination for performing settings related to the game and setting data for setting the setting destination indicated by the setting data are alternately defined in the control data. The data is read by the read control process in the order specified by the control data, and the next setting data to be read is set to the setting destination indicated by the read setting data.
Accordingly, when reading data, it is not necessary to perform a process of determining which data should be read next among the data specified in the control data, so that the processing load on the control unit can be reduced. There is an effect that can be.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not the game state is changed is determined by the state change determination unit. Various setting values relating to the gaming state are defined in the control data as setting data. When it is determined by the state change determining means that the game state is to be changed, the reading control processing is executed by the control means.
Thereby, when the game state is changed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a malfunction of the gaming machine without setting the set value to be set.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
110 Main controller (control means)
202 ROM (storage means)
202h big hit end clear table (storage means)
202j big hit end initial value setting table (storage means)
S1502, S1513 read processing
S1504, S1511, S1515 setting processing

Claims (3)

Control means for performing game control according to a predetermined control procedure;
Storage means for storing read control data by the control means;
Control data determining means for determining whether the control data read by the control means is predetermined specific data,
The control means, when executing a read control process which is a process of repeatedly reading the control data and performing a control based on the read control data in accordance with the control procedure, when the read control data is the specific data. A game machine that terminates the read control process based on a determination made by the control data determination unit and shifts to the next process executed according to the control procedure. The control data includes:
Setting destination data indicating a setting destination for performing settings relating to the game,
Setting data for setting to the setting destination indicated by the setting destination data is defined alternately,
The read control process reads data in an order defined by the control data, and sets next setting data to be read to a setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein A state change determining means for determining whether to change the game state is provided,
The control data is one in which various setting values relating to a game state are defined as the setting data,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the reading control process is executed when it is determined that the gaming state is changed by the state change determining unit.

Images